RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

263
RNC V100R010 Hardware Description Issue 03 Date 2008-08-30 Part Number Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

description

Huawei RNC 3G

Transcript of RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Page 1: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

RNC

V100R010

Hardware Description

Issue 03

Date 2008-08-30

Part Number

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 2: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 3: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Hardware Overview...................................................................................................................1-11.1 RNC Hardware Components...........................................................................................................................1-21.2 RNC Hardware Configuration........................................................................................................................1-3

2 WRSR Cabinet............................................................................................................................2-12.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets.........................................................................................................................2-32.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet.................................................................................................................2-3

2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22)........................................................................................2-42.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N)....................................................................................2-7

2.3 RNC Power Distribution Box.......................................................................................................................2-102.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box.................................................................................2-112.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box...........................................................2-112.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box.................................................................................2-122.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution Boxes.............................................................2-13

2.4 Switcher.........................................................................................................................................................2-142.5 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................2-152.6 GRU Suite.....................................................................................................................................................2-16

2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU Suite..............................................................................................................2-172.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite.........................................................................................2-182.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite..........................................................................................2-182.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU Suite...............................................................................................................2-19

2.7 Optical Cable Tray........................................................................................................................................2-192.8 Cable Tray.....................................................................................................................................................2-192.9 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................2-20

2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G).........................................................................................................................2-202.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)....................................................................................................................2-25

2.10 BAM Server ...............................................................................................................................................2-312.10.1 Functions of BAM..............................................................................................................................2-322.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)................................................................................2-332.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)...........................................................................2-37

2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR Cabinet...................................................................................................2-402.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR Cabinet.............................................................................2-40

RNCHardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

i

Page 4: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSR Cabinet..........................................2-412.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.........................................................................2-45

2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR Cabinet....................................................................................2-71

3 WRBR Cabinet............................................................................................................................3-13.1 Appearance of RNC Cabinets.........................................................................................................................3-23.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet................................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22).......................................................................................3-23.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N)...................................................................................3-4

3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR Cabinet......................................................................................................3-63.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR Cabinet................................................................................3-63.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBR Cabinet..............................................3-73.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet............................................................................3-9

3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR Cabinet......................................................................................3-14

4 WRSS Subrack............................................................................................................................4-14.1 Components of the WRSS Subrack................................................................................................................4-34.2 Fan Drawer......................................................................................................................................................4-44.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack..........................................................................................................................4-54.4 Inter-Subrack Connection...............................................................................................................................4-64.5 Transverse Cable Trough................................................................................................................................4-74.6 Air Inlets..........................................................................................................................................................4-74.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS Subrack........................................................................................4-7

5 WRBS Subrack............................................................................................................................5-15.1 Components of the WRBS Subrack................................................................................................................5-25.2 Boards in the WRBS Subrack.........................................................................................................................5-35.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS Subrack........................................................................................5-5

6 RNC Boards.................................................................................................................................6-16.1 RNC Board Compatibility...............................................................................................................................6-46.2 WBIE/WBIEb Board.......................................................................................................................................6-5

6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb Board.........................................................................................................6-56.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board........................................................................................................6-66.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.........................................................................................................6-76.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board............................................................................................6-8

6.3 WEIE Board..................................................................................................................................................6-106.3.1 Panel of the WEIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-106.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE Board....................................................................................................................6-116.3.3 Ports on the WEIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-126.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board.......................................................................................................6-12

6.4 WFEE Board.................................................................................................................................................6-146.4.1 Panel of the WFEE Board....................................................................................................................6-156.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE Board...................................................................................................................6-156.4.3 Ports on the WFEE Board....................................................................................................................6-16

ContentsRNC

Hardware Description

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 5: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board......................................................................................................6-176.5 WFIE Board..................................................................................................................................................6-18

6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-196.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE Board....................................................................................................................6-196.5.3 Ports on the WFIE Board.....................................................................................................................6-20

6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board.................................................................................................................6-206.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board....................................................................................6-216.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board...................................................................................6-22

6.7 WFSM Board................................................................................................................................................6-236.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board.........................................................................................................6-23

6.8 WHPU Board................................................................................................................................................6-246.8.1 Panel of the WHPU Board...................................................................................................................6-246.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU Board..................................................................................................................6-256.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board.........................................................................................................6-26

6.9 WLPU Board.................................................................................................................................................6-276.9.1 Panels of the WLPU Board..................................................................................................................6-286.9.2 LED on the WLPU Board....................................................................................................................6-286.9.3 Ports on the WLPU Board....................................................................................................................6-296.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board.........................................................................................................6-296.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU Boards..............................................................................6-31

6.10 WMPU Board..............................................................................................................................................6-316.10.1 Panel of the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................6-326.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU Board...............................................................................................................6-336.10.3 Ports on the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................6-336.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board......................................................................................................6-34

6.11 WMUX/WMUXb Board.............................................................................................................................6-356.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb Board................................................................................................6-356.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board...............................................................................................6-366.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb Board................................................................................................6-376.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb Boards..........................................................6-38

6.12 WNET/WNETc Board................................................................................................................................6-386.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc Board...................................................................................................6-396.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board..................................................................................................6-406.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc Board...................................................................................................6-406.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board.........................................................................................6-41

6.13 WOSE/WOSEb Board................................................................................................................................6-426.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb Board...................................................................................................6-436.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board .................................................................................................6-456.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb Board...................................................................................................6-466.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board......................................................................................6-466.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb Boards.............................................................6-48

6.14 WOSEc Board.............................................................................................................................................6-49

RNCHardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

iii

Page 6: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc Board................................................................................................................6-506.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc Board...............................................................................................................6-506.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc Board................................................................................................................6-516.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board..................................................................................................6-516.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc Boards..........................................................................6-53

6.15 WSPUb Board.............................................................................................................................................6-536.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb Board................................................................................................................6-546.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb Board...............................................................................................................6-54

6.16 WDMB Board.............................................................................................................................................6-556.16.1 Panel of the WDMB Board................................................................................................................6-556.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB Board...............................................................................................................6-566.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board......................................................................................................6-57

6.17 WOPB Board...............................................................................................................................................6-57

7 RNC Cables.................................................................................................................................7-17.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial Cable........................................................................................................................... 7-57.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable..................................................................................................................7-87.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-117.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-137.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-147.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-157.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-177.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-197.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable......................................................................................7-227.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-237.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable.......................................................................................7-257.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable........................................................................................7-267.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-287.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.....................................................................................7-287.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable.........................................................................................7-297.16 RNC Crossover Cable.................................................................................................................................7-317.17 RNC Straight-Through Cable......................................................................................................................7-327.18 RNC Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-337.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal Cable....................................................................................................................7-347.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXb..........................................................................7-357.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETc.............................................................................7-377.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power Distribution Box........................................................................7-397.23 RNC Power Cable.......................................................................................................................................7-407.24 RNC PGND Cable......................................................................................................................................7-41

8 LEDs on RNC Boards................................................................................................................8-18.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution Box...................................................................... 8-38.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU Suite....................................................................................................8-38.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G).......................................................................................8-4

ContentsRNC

Hardware Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 7: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)............................................................................8-58.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.................................................................................................................8-88.6 LEDs on the WEIE Board...............................................................................................................................8-98.7 LEDs on the WFEE Board............................................................................................................................8-108.8 LEDs on the WFIE Board.............................................................................................................................8-108.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc Board............................................................................................8-118.10 LEDs on the WHPU Board.........................................................................................................................8-128.11 LED on the WLPU Board...........................................................................................................................8-128.12 LEDs on the WMPU Board........................................................................................................................8-138.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb Board........................................................................................................8-138.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc Board...........................................................................................................8-148.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb Board ..........................................................................................................8-148.16 LEDs on the WOSEc Board........................................................................................................................8-158.17 LEDs on the WSPUb Board........................................................................................................................8-168.18 LEDs on the WDMB Board........................................................................................................................8-16

9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards..................................................................................................9-19.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb Board.....................................................................................................9-39.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE Board..................................................................................................................9-59.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE Board.................................................................................................................9-69.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM Board....................................................................................................................9-89.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU Board....................................................................................................................9-99.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU Board..................................................................................................................9-109.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board.................................................................................................................9-119.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc Board....................................................................................................9-139.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb Board.................................................................................................9-149.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board...........................................................................................................9-159.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB Board...............................................................................................................9-17

RNCHardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

v

Page 8: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 9: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figures

Figure 1-1 RNC hardware components................................................................................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Minimum configuration......................................................................................................................1-3Figure 1-3 Maximum configuration.....................................................................................................................1-4Figure 2-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet..................................................................................................................2-3Figure 2-2 N68-22 WRSR assembly diagram (front view).................................................................................2-5Figure 2-3 N68-22-N WRSR assembly diagram (front view).............................................................................2-8Figure 2-4 Front panel of the power distribution box........................................................................................2-11Figure 2-5 Back panel of the power distribution box.........................................................................................2-12Figure 2-6 Switcher............................................................................................................................................2-14Figure 2-7 Front panel of the switcher...............................................................................................................2-14Figure 2-8 Back panel of the switcher................................................................................................................2-15Figure 2-9 KVM.................................................................................................................................................2-16Figure 2-10 Front panel of the KVM.................................................................................................................2-16Figure 2-11 Back panel of the KVM..................................................................................................................2-16Figure 2-12 GRU suite.......................................................................................................................................2-17Figure 2-13 Front panel of the GRU suite..........................................................................................................2-17Figure 2-14 Back panel of the GRU box............................................................................................................2-19Figure 2-15 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................2-21Figure 2-16 Front panel of the S3528G LAN switch.........................................................................................2-22Figure 2-17 Back panel of the S3528G LAN switch.........................................................................................2-23Figure 2-18 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................2-25Figure 2-19 Front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch....................................................................................2-26Figure 2-20 Back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.....................................................................................2-30Figure 2-21 Logical structure of OM subsystem................................................................................................2-33Figure 2-22 BAM server (IBM X3650T)...........................................................................................................2-34Figure 2-23 Front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T).............................................................................2-34Figure 2-24 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..............................................................................2-36Figure 2-25 BAM server (IBM X343-8847)......................................................................................................2-37Figure 2-26 Front panel of the BAM server.......................................................................................................2-37Figure 2-27 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).........................................................................2-39Figure 2-28 Power supply of the WRSR............................................................................................................2-40Figure 2-29 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X343-8847)...........2-42Figure 2-30 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBM X3650T)................2-43

RNCHardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

vii

Page 10: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-31 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed).......................2-46Figure 2-32 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed)............................2-47Figure 2-33 Connections of WRSR signal cables (Right view).........................................................................2-48Figure 3-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet..................................................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 N68-22 WRBR assembly diagram (front view).................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 N68-22-N WRBR assembly diagram (front view).............................................................................3-5Figure 3-4 Power supply of the WRBR...............................................................................................................3-7Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRBR..........................................................3-8Figure 3-6 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (1)....................................................................................3-10Figure 3-7 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (2)....................................................................................3-11Figure 4-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................4-3Figure 4-2 Fan drawer..........................................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-3 WRSS in full configuration................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-4 Connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack..................................................4-6Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-2Figure 5-2 Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based).............................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Full Configuration (WFIEs shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface).........................................................5-4Figure 5-4 Full configuration (Iur/Iu interface, IP based, WFIEs in slots 1 and 14 used)...................................5-5Figure 6-1 WBIE/WBIEb panel...........................................................................................................................6-6Figure 6-2 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb....................................................................................................6-8Figure 6-3 WEIE panel.......................................................................................................................................6-11Figure 6-4 DIP switches on the WEIE...............................................................................................................6-13Figure 6-5 WFEE panel......................................................................................................................................6-15Figure 6-6 DIP switches on the WFEE..............................................................................................................6-17Figure 6-7 WFIE panel.......................................................................................................................................6-19Figure 6-8 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel......................................................................................................6-22Figure 6-9 DIP switch on the WFSM.................................................................................................................6-23Figure 6-10 WHPU panel...................................................................................................................................6-25Figure 6-11 DIP switch on the WHPU...............................................................................................................6-26Figure 6-12 WLPU panels..................................................................................................................................6-28Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the WLPU...............................................................................................................6-30Figure 6-14 WMPU panel..................................................................................................................................6-32Figure 6-15 DIP switch on the WMPU..............................................................................................................6-34Figure 6-16 WMUX/WMUXb panel.................................................................................................................6-36Figure 6-17 WNET/WNETc panel.....................................................................................................................6-39Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc............................................................6-41Figure 6-19 WOSE panel...................................................................................................................................6-44Figure 6-20 WOSEb panel.................................................................................................................................6-45Figure 6-21 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb...................................................................................................6-47Figure 6-22 WOSEc panel.................................................................................................................................6-50Figure 6-23 DIP switches on the WOSEc..........................................................................................................6-52Figure 6-24 WSPUb panel.................................................................................................................................6-54

FiguresRNC

Hardware Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 11: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-25 WDMB panel..................................................................................................................................6-56Figure 6-26 DIP switch on the WDMB..............................................................................................................6-57Figure 7-1 75-ohm coaxial cable..........................................................................................................................7-6Figure 7-2 120-ohm twisted pair cable.................................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-3 MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-12Figure 7-4 MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-13Figure 7-5 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-14Figure 7-6 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable.........................................................................................7-16Figure 7-7 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-17Figure 7-8 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.........................................................................................7-20Figure 7-9 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.....................................................................................7-22Figure 7-10 SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-24Figure 7-11 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable.......................................................................................7-25Figure 7-12 LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-27Figure 7-13 LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-28Figure 7-14 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable....................................................................................7-29Figure 7-15 SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable........................................................................................7-30Figure 7-16 Crossover cable...............................................................................................................................7-31Figure 7-17 Pins of the crossover cable.............................................................................................................7-31Figure 7-18 Straight-through cable....................................................................................................................7-32Figure 7-19 Pins of the straight-through cable...................................................................................................7-33Figure 7-20 Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc..........................................7-34Figure 7-21 BITS clock cable............................................................................................................................7-34Figure 7-22 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-35Figure 7-23 Installation position of the alarm box signal cable.........................................................................7-35Figure 7-24 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and WMUX/WMUXb.....................................................7-36Figure 7-25 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc...................................................7-38Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box..................................................................7-39Figure 7-27 RNC -48V/GND power cables.......................................................................................................7-41Figure 7-28 PGND cable....................................................................................................................................7-42Figure 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb....................................................................................................9-3Figure 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE.................................................................................................................9-5Figure 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE................................................................................................................9-7Figure 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM...................................................................................................................9-8Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU...................................................................................................................9-9Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU.................................................................................................................9-10Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU................................................................................................................9-12Figure 9-8 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc..............................................................9-13Figure 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.....................................................................................................9-14Figure 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc..........................................................................................................9-16Figure 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB..............................................................................................................9-17

RNCHardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

ix

Page 12: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 13: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Tables

Table 1-1 RNC hardware......................................................................................................................................1-2Table 1-2 Typical configurations......................................................................................................................... 1-4Table 2-1 Internal configuration of the WRSR....................................................................................................2-6Table 2-2 Internal configuration of the WRSR....................................................................................................2-9Table 2-3 LEDs on the power distribution box..................................................................................................2-12Table 2-4 Technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes.............................................................2-13Table 2-5 Front panel of the switcher.................................................................................................................2-14Table 2-6 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite.........................................................................................2-18Table 2-7 Ports on the front panel of the GRU suite..........................................................................................2-18Table 2-8 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch........................................................................2-22Table 2-9 GBIC modules applicable to the RNC...............................................................................................2-24Table 2-10 Specifications for optical ports on LAN switches (S3528G)...........................................................2-24Table 2-11 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch..................................................................2-26Table 2-12 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC...........................................................................2-30Table 2-13 Specifications for optical ports on the LAN switches (S3928P-EI).................................................2-31Table 2-14 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..................................................2-34Table 2-15 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)..................................................2-36Table 2-16 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).............................................2-38Table 2-17 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).............................................2-39Table 2-18 Relation between the power control switches and the WRSR components.....................................2-41Table 2-19 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR..........................................................................2-44Table 2-20 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed)........................2-49Table 2-21 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed).............................2-58Table 2-22 Connection between the WFIE and the LAN switches....................................................................2-68Table 2-23 Structural specifications of the WRSR............................................................................................2-71Table 2-24 Electrical specifications of the WRSR.............................................................................................2-72Table 3-1 WRBR configuration........................................................................................................................... 3-4Table 3-2 WRBR configuration........................................................................................................................... 3-6Table 3-3 Relationship between the power control switches and the components.............................................. 3-7Table 3-4 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR..............................................................................3-9Table 3-5 Signal cables in the WRBR................................................................................................................3-12Table 3-6 Structural specifications of the WRBR..............................................................................................3-15Table 3-7 Electrical specifications of the WRBR...............................................................................................3-15

RNCHardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

xi

Page 14: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 4-1 Components of the WRSS................................................................................................................... 4-3Table 4-2 LED on the fan drawer.........................................................................................................................4-5Table 4-3 Engineering specifications of the WRSS.............................................................................................4-7Table 5-1 Components of the WRBS...................................................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 Engineering specifications of the WRBS.............................................................................................5-5Table 6-1 Compatibility between WRBS interface boards..................................................................................6-4Table 6-2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.......................................................................................................6-6Table 6-3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel........................................................................................................6-7Table 6-4 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.....................................................................................................6-8Table 6-5 LEDs on the WEIE panel...................................................................................................................6-11Table 6-6 Ports on the WEIE panel....................................................................................................................6-12Table 6-7 DIP switches on the WEIE.................................................................................................................6-13Table 6-8 LEDs on the WFEE panel..................................................................................................................6-16Table 6-9 Ports on the WFEE panel...................................................................................................................6-16Table 6-10 DIP switches on the WFEE..............................................................................................................6-17Table 6-11 LEDs on the WFIE panel.................................................................................................................6-20Table 6-12 Ports on the WFIE panel..................................................................................................................6-20Table 6-13 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel................................................................................6-22Table 6-14 DIP switch on the WFSM................................................................................................................6-24Table 6-15 LEDs on the WHPU panel...............................................................................................................6-25Table 6-16 DIP switch on the WHPU................................................................................................................6-27Table 6-17 LED on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................6-29Table 6-18 Ports on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................6-29Table 6-19 DIP switch on the WLPU.................................................................................................................6-30Table 6-20 Specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards............................................................................6-31Table 6-21 LEDs on the WMPU panel..............................................................................................................6-33Table 6-22 Ports on the WMPU panel................................................................................................................6-33Table 6-23 DIP switch on the WMPU................................................................................................................6-34Table 6-24 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel..............................................................................................6-37Table 6-25 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel...............................................................................................6-37Table 6-26 Specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards..........................................................6-38Table 6-27 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.................................................................................................6-40Table 6-28 Ports on the WNET/WNETc panel..................................................................................................6-40Table 6-29 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc..................................................................6-42Table 6-30 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel.......................................................................................................6-45Table 6-31 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb panel..................................................................................................6-46Table 6-32 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.....................................................................................................6-47Table 6-33 Specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards............................................................................6-48Table 6-34 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards..........................................................................6-49Table 6-35 LEDs on the WOSEc panel..............................................................................................................6-51Table 6-36 Ports on the WOSEc panel...............................................................................................................6-51Table 6-37 DIP switches on the WOSEc............................................................................................................6-52

TablesRNC

Hardware Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 15: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-38 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards..........................................................................6-53Table 6-39 LEDs on the WSPUb panel..............................................................................................................6-54Table 6-40 LEDs on the WDMB panel..............................................................................................................6-56Table 6-41 DIP switch on the WDMB...............................................................................................................6-57Table 7-1 Relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50 connectors........................................7-7Table 7-2 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.............................................................................7-8Table 7-3 Relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors.......................................7-10Table 7-4 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable..............................................................................7-11Table 7-5 Pins of the crossover cable.................................................................................................................7-31Table 7-6 Pins of the straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-33Table 7-7 Pins of the alarm box signal cable......................................................................................................7-35Table 7-8 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (1)...................7-36Table 7-9 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (2)...................7-37Table 7-10 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc..........................7-38Table 7-11 Signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box..........................................7-39Table 7-12 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-39Table 7-13 Power cables connecting the RNC cabinet......................................................................................7-40Table 7-14 PGND cables connecting the RNC cabinet......................................................................................7-41Table 8-1 LEDs on the power distribution box....................................................................................................8-3Table 8-2 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite...........................................................................................8-3Table 8-3 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch..........................................................................8-4Table 8-4 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch......................................................................8-5Table 8-5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.......................................................................................................8-9Table 8-6 LEDs on the WEIE panel.....................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-7 LEDs on the WFEE panel..................................................................................................................8-10Table 8-8 LEDs on the WFIE panel...................................................................................................................8-11Table 8-9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel..................................................................................8-11Table 8-10 LEDs on the WHPU panel...............................................................................................................8-12Table 8-11 LED on the WLPU panel.................................................................................................................8-12Table 8-12 LEDs on the WMPU panel..............................................................................................................8-13Table 8-13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel..............................................................................................8-13Table 8-14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.................................................................................................8-14Table 8-15 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel.......................................................................................................8-15Table 8-16 LEDs on the WOSEc panel..............................................................................................................8-15Table 8-17 LEDs on the WSPUb panel..............................................................................................................8-16Table 8-18 LEDs on the WDMB panel..............................................................................................................8-16Table 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.....................................................................................................9-3Table 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE...................................................................................................................9-6Table 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE..................................................................................................................9-7Table 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM....................................................................................................................9-8Table 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU....................................................................................................................9-9Table 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU...................................................................................................................9-11

RNCHardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

xiii

Page 16: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU..................................................................................................................9-12Table 9-8 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc.................................................................... 9-13Table 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.......................................................................................................9-15Table 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc............................................................................................................9-16Table 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB...............................................................................................................9-17

TablesRNC

Hardware Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 17: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the hardware components of the RNC. It provides the users with adetailed and comprehensive reference to Huawei RNC.

VersionThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Model Version

RNC BSC6800 V100R010

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

l RNC installers

l RNC site operators

Change HistoryRefer to Changes in RNC Hardware Description.

Organization1 Hardware Overview

This describes the RNC hardware in terms of the hardware components and the hardwareconfiguration.

2 WRSR Cabinet

This describes the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR performs the switching function of the RNC.Each RNC is configured with one WRSR.

3 WRBR Cabinet

This describes the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR performs the service processing function of theRNC. It is optional. The RNC can be configured with zero to five WRBRs as required.

RNCHardware Description About This Document

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1

Page 18: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

4 WRSS Subrack

This describes the WRSS subrack. The WRSS is configured in the WRSR. The RNC must beconfigured with one and only one WRSS. The WRSS exchanges data, processes PS services,and provides timing signals for the system.

5 WRBS Subrack

This describes the WRBS subrack. The WRBS subrack is installed in the WRSR and the WRBR.It is optional. The RNC should be configured with at least one WRBS. The quantity of WRBSsconfigured for the RNC varies from 1 to 16 according to the system capacity required for theengineering. The main functions of the WRBS are performing protocol processing on the controlplane, performing AAL2 switching and termination of the service data on the user plane, andperforming related protocol processing on the user plane. The WRBS provides E1/T1transmission ports and channelized STM-1 ATM transmission ports for the Iu, Iu-BC, Iur, andIub interfaces. It also provides E1/T1 IP transmission ports and FE IP transmission ports for theIu, Iur interface.

6 RNC Boards

This describes the RNC boards. The RNC boards include the following: WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, WFEE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb,WSPUb, WFSM, WOPB, WDMB, WLPU, WMPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc.

7 RNC Cables

This part describes all the cables used inside and outside the RNC cabinet.

8 LEDs on RNC Boards

This describes the LEDs on the RNC boards and on the front panels of the power distributionbox, GRU suite, and LAN switch. The RNC boards include the following types: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFIE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WMUX/WMUXb, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, WSPUb, and WDMB.

9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

This describes the DIP switches on the following RNC boards: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE,WFEE, WFSM, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, andWDMB.

Conventions

1. Symbol Conventions

The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, ifnot avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

About This DocumentRNC

Hardware Description

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 19: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Symbol Description

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save yourtime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

2. General Conventions

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. Forexample,log in as user root .

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

3. Command Conventions

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

{x | y | ...} Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.

4. GUI Conventions

RNCHardware Description About This Document

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3

Page 20: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are inboldface. For example,click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.For example,choose File > Create > Folder .

5. Keyboard Operation

Convention Description

Key Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.

Key1+Key2 Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+Ameans the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key1,Key2 Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the twokeys should be pressed in turn.

6. Mouse Operation

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving thepointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quicklywithout moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.

About This DocumentRNC

Hardware Description

4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 21: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

1 Hardware Overview

About This Chapter

This describes the RNC hardware in terms of the hardware components and the hardwareconfiguration.

1.1 RNC Hardware ComponentsThis describes the RNC hardware components. The RNC hardware consists of the cabinet,cables, GPS antenna system, LMT, and alarm box.

1.2 RNC Hardware ConfigurationThis describes the RNC hardware configuration. The RNC hardware configurations refer to theminimum configuration, the maximum configuration, the typical configurations and the capacityexpansion configuration.

RNCHardware Description 1 Hardware Overview

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-1

Page 22: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

1.1 RNC Hardware ComponentsThis describes the RNC hardware components. The RNC hardware consists of the cabinet,cables, GPS antenna system, LMT, and alarm box.

Figure 1-1 shows the RNC hardware components.

Figure 1-1 RNC hardware components

(1) GPS: Global PositioningSystem

(2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame(DC)

(3) LMT: Local MaintenanceTerminal

NOTE

The hub as shown in Figure 1-1 is prepared by the customer. It is used when more than one LMT isconfigured.

Table 1-1 describes the components of the RNC.

Table 1-1 RNC hardware

Component Description

WRSR cabinet Refer to 2 WRSR Cabinet.

WRBR cabinet Refer to 3 WRBR Cabinet.

RNC cables Refer to 7 RNC Cables.

1 Hardware OverviewRNC

Hardware Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 23: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Component Description

RNC GPS antenna system The system is composed of the antenna, feeder, jumper,and lightning arrester.The RNC GPS antenna system is used to receive GPSsatellite signals. It is optional.

RNC LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM)terminal that is installed with the Huawei LocalMaintenance Terminal software and is connected with theOM network of Network Elements (NEs). The LMT isused to operate and maintain Network NEs.For details, refer to the A RNC LMT User Guide.The RNC LMT is optional. The number of LMTs to beconfigured is determined according to the requirements.

RNC alarm box Refer to RNC Alarm Box.

1.2 RNC Hardware ConfigurationThis describes the RNC hardware configuration. The RNC hardware configurations refer to theminimum configuration, the maximum configuration, the typical configurations and the capacityexpansion configuration.

Minimum ConfigurationThe RNC supports the configuration of a single cabinet, that is, one RNC requires only oneWRSR cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Minimum configuration

The performance specifications for the RNC minimum configuration are as follows:l A maximum of 2,500 Erlang traffic volume

l 62.5 thousand subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is0.04 Erlang

RNCHardware Description 1 Hardware Overview

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-3

Page 24: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

l 60 Mbit/s data throughput

l 100 NodeBs and 300 cells

Maximum ConfigurationAs shown in Figure 1-3, the maximum configuration for an RNC consists of six cabinets (oneWRSR cabinet and five WRBR cabinets) and 17 subracks (one WRSS subrack and 16 WRBSsubracks).

Figure 1-3 Maximum configuration

Below lists the performance specifications for the RNC maximum configuration:l A maximum of 40,000 traffic volume Erlang

l 1 million subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is 0.04Erlang

l 960 Mbit/s data throughput

l 1600 NodeBs and 4800 cells

Typical ConfigurationsThe performance specifications for the RNC typical configurations are listed in Table 1-2. Youcan determine the configurations based on actual requirements.

Table 1-2 Typical configurations

Configuration

Number ofCabinets

TrafficVolume(Erlang)

Number ofSubscribers

Number ofNodeBs

Number ofCells

WRSS+BAM+1 WRBS

1 2,500 62.5thousand

100 300

WRSS+BAM+4 WRBSs

2 10,000 250thousand

400 1,200

WRSS+BAM+7 WRBSs

3 17,500 437.5thousand

700 2,100

1 Hardware OverviewRNC

Hardware Description

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 25: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Configuration

Number ofCabinets

TrafficVolume(Erlang)

Number ofSubscribers

Number ofNodeBs

Number ofCells

WRSS+BAM+10 WRBSs

4 25,000 625thousand

1,000 3,000

WRSS+BAM+13 WRBSs

5 32,500 812.5thousand

1,300 3,900

WRSS+BAM+16 WRBSs

6 40,000 1 million 1,600 4,800

Capacity Expansion ConfigurationThe RNC system features a modular design and can smoothly realize the capacity expansionbased on the WRSS+BAM+1WRBS solution and by adding WRBS subracks. The process ofcapacity expansion does not interrupt the services.

The smoothly capacity expansion is achieved after the addition of the WRBS subracks. Theperformance specifications for the RNC = performance specifications of a single WRBS subrackx number of subracks. The performance specifications of a single WRBS subrack are as follows:l A maximum of 2,500 Erlang traffic volume

l 62.5 thousand subscribers in the assumption that the traffic volume for each subscriber is0.04 Erlang

l 60 Mbit/s data throughput

l 100 NodeBs and 300 cells

RNCHardware Description 1 Hardware Overview

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-5

Page 26: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 27: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2 WRSR Cabinet

About This Chapter

This describes the WRSR cabinet. The WRSR performs the switching function of the RNC.Each RNC is configured with one WRSR.

2.1 Appearance of RNC CabinetsThis describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22-N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance.

2.2 Components of the WRSR CabinetThis describes the components of the WRSR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the samewhile the internal configurations are slightly different.

2.3 RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the RNC power distribution box. Each RNC cabinet must be configured with onepower distribution box. The power distribution box is installed at the top of the cabinet.

2.4 SwitcherThis describes the switcher. When two BAM servers are configured in the system, they sharethe same KVM. In this case, a switcher is required to control their use of the KVM. The WRSRmust be configured with one switcher. The switcher is installed above the KVM.

2.5 KVMThis describes the KVM. The KVM is an integrated device, including mouse, keyboard andmonitor. It is an operation platform shared by the two BAM servers. The WRSR must beconfigured with one KVM. The KVM is installed between the WRBS and the switcher.

2.6 GRU SuiteThis describes the GRU suite. The GRU suite receives and processes positioning informationand synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then exports the timing signals as a systemclock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate systemRFNs and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The GRU suite is optionalfor the RNC. The RNC can be configured with one or two GRU suites when the system providesthe positioning function. When two GRU suites are installed, they work in active/standby modeand support 1+1 backup. The GRU suite is installed in the GRU box which is located betweenthe WRBS and the optical cable tray.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-1

Page 28: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.7 Optical Cable TrayThis describes the optical cable tray. The optical cable tray supports the optical cables that arefrom the front of the subracks to the back of the cabinet.

2.8 Cable TrayThis describes the cable tray. The WRSR shall be configured with one or two LAN switch cabletrays based on the site requirements. One cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-0 and LANSwitch-1, and the other cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3. Thecable trays provide space for Ethernet cables of the two neighboring LAN switches.

2.9 LAN SwitchThis describes the LAN switch. The LAN switch provides 10M/100M Ethernet ports, GE portsand VLAN functions for the RNC. The WRSR should be configured with two, that is LANswitch-0 and LAN switch-1, or at most four LAN switches according to the site requirements.The RNC LAN switches refer to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LAN switch (S3928P-EI).

2.10 BAM ServerThis describes the BAM server. The RNC BAM server can use either the IBM X343-8847 orthe IBM X3650T. The RNC is configured with one BAM server (single-server system) or twoBAM servers (dual-server system) according to the site requirements. The BAM servers areinstalled at the bottom of the WRSR.

2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR CabinetThis describes the cable connections in the WRSR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRSRcabinet refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable.

2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR CabinetThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRSR cabinet. The engineeringspecifications for the N68-22 WRSR and N68-22-N WRSR include structural specifications andelectrical specifications.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 29: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.1 Appearance of RNC CabinetsThis describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22-N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance.

The appearance of the RNC cabinet is shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet

2.2 Components of the WRSR CabinetThis describes the components of the WRSR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the samewhile the internal configurations are slightly different.

2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22)This describes the components of the N68-22 WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switchcable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.

2.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N)This describes the components of the N68-22-N WRSR cabinet. The components refer to thepower distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LANswitch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-3

Page 30: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.2.1 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22)This describes the components of the N68-22 WRSR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LAN switchcable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.

ConfigurationFigure 2-2 shows the N68-22 WRSR configuration.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 31: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-2 N68-22 WRSR assembly diagram (front view)

(1) BAM_Lower (2) Filler panel (3) BAM_Upper

(4) LAN Switch-0 (5) LAN switch cable tray (6) LAN Switch-1

(7) Optical cable tray (8) GRU suite (optional) (9) WRBS

(10) KVM (11) Switcher (12) LAN Switch-2

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-5

Page 32: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

(13) LAN Switch-3 (14) WRSS (15) Power distribution box

NOTE

The N68-22 WRSR is 46 U high inside. There is a 1 U filler panel between the switcher and the LANSwitch-2 in the N68-22 WRSR.

Configuration Description

Table 2-1 Internal configuration of the WRSR

Component Configuration Refer toSection… Remarks

Powerdistributionbox

1, mandatory RNC PowerDistribution Box None

WRSSsubrack 1, mandatory WRSS Subrack None

Switcher 1, mandatory Switcher Purchased device

KVM 1, mandatory KVM Purchased device

WRBSsubrack 1, mandatory WRBS Subrack None

GRU suite Optional GRU Suite

1 or 2 GRU suites areconfigured when thesystem provides thepositioning function.

Optical cabletray 1, mandatory Optical Cable

Tray None

Cable tray

1 or 2 The number of LANswitch cable trays isdetermined as required.When only LAN Switch-0and LAN Switch-1 areconfigured, the cable tray forthe LAN Switch-2 and theLAN Switch-3 is covered bya filler panel.

Cable Tray None

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 33: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Component Configuration Refer toSection… Remarks

LAN switch

1 or 2. The number of LANswitch cable trays isdetermined as required,When RNC is fullyconfigured the number ofLAN switch is 4.When only LAN Switch-0and LAN Switch-1 areconfigured, the cable tray forLAN Switch-2 and LANSwitch-3 is covered by thefiller panel.

LAN Switch

Select two or fourLAN switchesaccording to the actualrequirements such asthe required number ofFE ports and whetherthe LAN switches foroperation andmaintenance and thosefor services should beseparated.

BAM server1 for single-server BAMsystem; 2 for dual-serverBAM system

BAM Server Purchased device

2.2.2 Components of the WRSR Cabinet (N68-22-N)This describes the components of the N68-22-N WRSR cabinet. The components refer to thepower distribution box, WRSS, switcher, KVM, WRBS, GRU suite, optical cable tray, LANswitch cable tray, LAN switch, and BAM server.

ConfigurationFigure 2-3 shows the N68-22-N WRSR configuration.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-7

Page 34: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-3 N68-22-N WRSR assembly diagram (front view)

(1) BAM_Lower (2) Filler panel (3) BAM_Upper

(4) LAN Switch-0 (5) LAN switch cable tray (6) LAN Switch-1

(7) Optical cable tray (8) GRU suite (optional) (9) WRBS

(10) KVM (11) Switcher (12) LAN Switch-2

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 35: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

(13) LAN Switch-3 (14) WRSS (15) Power distribution box

NOTEThe N68-22-N WRSR is 45 U high inside. There is no filler panel between the switcher and the LANSwitch-2 in the N68-22-N WRSR.

Configuration Description

Table 2-2 Internal configuration of the WRSR

Component Configuration Refer toSection… Remarks

Powerdistributionbox

1, mandatoryRNC PowerDistributionBox

None

WRSS subrack 1, mandatory WRSS Subrack None

Switcher 1, mandatory Switcher Purchased device

KVM 1, mandatory KVM Purchased device

WRBSsubrack 1, mandatory WRBS Subrack None

GRU suite Optional GRU Suite

One or two GRUsuites areconfigured when thesystem provides thepositioning function

Optical cabletray 1, mandatory Optical Cable

Tray None

Cable tray

1 or 2. The number of LANswitch cable trays is determinedas required. When only LANSwitch-0 and LAN Switch-1 areconfigured, the cable tray for theLAN Switch-2 and the LANSwitch-3 is covered by a fillerpanel.

Cable Tray None

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-9

Page 36: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Component Configuration Refer toSection… Remarks

LAN switch

1 or 2. The number of LANswitch cable trays is determinedas required, When RNC isfully configured the number ofLAN switch is 4.When only LAN Switch-0 andLAN Switch-1 are configured,the cable tray for LAN Switch-2and LAN Switch-3 is covered bythe filler panel.

LAN Switch

In a whole RNCsystem, select twoor four LANswitches accordingto the actualrequirements suchas the requirednumber of FE portsand whether theLAN switches foroperation andmaintenance andthose for servicesshould be separated.

BAM server 1 for single-server BAM system;2 for dual-server BAM system BAM Server Purchased device

2.3 RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the RNC power distribution box. Each RNC cabinet must be configured with onepower distribution box. The power distribution box is installed at the top of the cabinet.

The power distribution box provides lightning protection and overcurrent protection for the twoinputs of –48 V power to the cabinet. Then, it outputs six channels of –48 V power to functionalmodules in the cabinet. It also detects the input voltage and the output power status, and sendsout alarms when faults occur.

2.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the frontpanel of the RNC power distribution box are the WDMB panel, alarm sound switch, labels ofpower distribution switches, power distribution switches, and WOPB panel.

2.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDsRUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box.

2.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the back panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the backpanel of the RNC power distribution box refer to the power input terminal block, the poweroutput terminal block, the port for the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, andthe communication serial port.

2.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution BoxesThe technical specifications for power distribution boxes of the RNC consist of inputspecifications and output specifications.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 37: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.3.1 Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the frontpanel of the RNC power distribution box are the WDMB panel, alarm sound switch, labels ofpower distribution switches, power distribution switches, and WOPB panel.

Figure 2-4 shows the front panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 2-4 Front panel of the power distribution box

CAUTIONl Before operating a power distribution switch, see the distribution label on the panel of the

power distribution box.l Before disassembling a device whose power is controlled by a switch, you need to switch

off this device and then remove the power cables.l For details of the WDMB and WOPB, refer to 6.16 WDMB Board and 6.17 WOPB

Board.

You can use the alarm sound switch to set the power distribution box to emit sound or not:

l If you set the switch to ON, the power distribution box emits sound when it is faulty.

l If you set the switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not emit sound when it isfaulty.

2.3.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDsRUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box.

Table 2-3 describes the LEDs.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-11

Page 38: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-3 LEDs on the power distribution box

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The WDMB works properly andcommunicates with the WMUXb properly.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The WDMB is not working or it does notcommunicate with the WMUXb properly.

OFF The power supply for the WDMB isabnormal or the power distribution boxdoes not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm concerning the powerdistribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.However, in the WDMB self-test, theALM LED is always ON. It is an indicationthat the ALM LED is functional.

2.3.3 Back Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the back panel of the RNC power distribution box. The components on the backpanel of the RNC power distribution box refer to the power input terminal block, the poweroutput terminal block, the port for the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, andthe communication serial port.

Figure 2-5 shows the back panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 2-5 Back panel of the power distribution box

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port for monitoring signal cable of thepower distribution box

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 39: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

Figure 2-5 shows only the main ports related to the RNC.

On the power input terminal block and the power output terminal block, the connecting positions of the –48 V power cables are labeled –48 V and the connecting positions of the GND power cables are labeledRTN.

The monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box is connected to the MONITOR port on thelowest WRBS subrack in the RNC cabinet. In this way, the communication between the power distributionboard and the board on the server is realized.

2.3.4 Technical Specifications for RNC Power Distribution BoxesThe technical specifications for power distribution boxes of the RNC consist of inputspecifications and output specifications.

Table 2-4 describes the technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes.

Table 2-4 Technical specifications for RNC power distribution boxes

Item Specification

Input Rated inputvoltage

–48 V

Input voltagerange

–40 V to –57 V

Input mode Two –48 V inputs in 1+1 hot backup mode

Maximum inputcurrent

100 A for each input

Output Rated outputvoltage

–48 V

Output voltagerange

–40 V to –57 V

Rated outputpower

4,800 W (–48 V input)

Output modeand current

The RNC provides six groups of independent –48 Voutputs. These groups correspond to switches SW1–SW6.For SW1–SW3, the rated current for each output is 30 A;for SW4–SW6, it is 70 A.The RNC provides overcurrent protection. For SW1–SW3,the overcurrent protection triggering point is 37.5 A foreach output; for SW4–SW6, it is 87.5 A for each output.After the overcurrent protection, the associated switchneeds to be manually set back to the working mode.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-13

Page 40: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.4 SwitcherThis describes the switcher. When two BAM servers are configured in the system, they sharethe same KVM. In this case, a switcher is required to control their use of the KVM. The WRSRmust be configured with one switcher. The switcher is installed above the KVM.

AppearanceFigure 2-6 shows the appearance of the switcher.

Figure 2-6 Switcher

Front PanelFigure 2-7 shows the front panel of the switcher.

Figure 2-7 Front panel of the switcher

Table 2-5 describes the front panel of the switcher.

Table 2-5 Front panel of the switcher

No. Description

(1) SKIP, used to enable/disable the AutoSkip function. The RNC does not useit.

(2) SCAN, used to enable/disable the AutoScan function and set the scanningrate. The RNC does not use it.

(3) Channel LEDs. When the switcher is in normal communication with acomputer on a channel, the corresponding LED is red.

(4) AutoSkip LED. When the AutoSkip function is enabled, the LED is green.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 41: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

No. Description

(5) AutoScan LED. When the AutoScan function is enabled, the LED is green.

(6) Channel selection. Channel buttons 1 to 8 correspond to channels 1 to 8 whichare labeled on the back panel of the switcher.

Back PanelFigure 2-8 shows the back panel of the switcher.

Figure 2-8 Back panel of the switcher

(1) Power switch (2) Mouse port (3) Serial port for switcher function setting

(4) Cable sockets for BAM servers (5) DC input power socket (6) Keyboard port

(7) Monitor port

2.5 KVMThis describes the KVM. The KVM is an integrated device, including mouse, keyboard andmonitor. It is an operation platform shared by the two BAM servers. The WRSR must beconfigured with one KVM. The KVM is installed between the WRBS and the switcher.

AppearanceFigure 2-9 shows the appearance of the KVM.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-15

Page 42: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-9 KVM

Front Panel

Figure 2-10 shows the front panel of the KVM.

Figure 2-10 Front panel of the KVM

Back Panel

Figure 2-11 shows the back panel of the KVM.

Figure 2-11 Back panel of the KVM

2.6 GRU SuiteThis describes the GRU suite. The GRU suite receives and processes positioning informationand synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then exports the timing signals as a systemclock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate systemRFNs and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The GRU suite is optionalfor the RNC. The RNC can be configured with one or two GRU suites when the system providesthe positioning function. When two GRU suites are installed, they work in active/standby mode

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 43: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

and support 1+1 backup. The GRU suite is installed in the GRU box which is located betweenthe WRBS and the optical cable tray.

Figure 2-12 shows the GRU suite.

Figure 2-12 GRU suite

2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes the front panel of the GRU suite. There are the following components on the frontpanel of the GRU suite: LEDs, RST button, and output ports.

2.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM,and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite.

2.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes ports on the front panel of the GRU suite. The ports refer to PPS1, PPS2, COM1,COM2, CLK1, and CLK2.

2.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes the back panel of the GRU suite. The components on the back panel refer to thepower input socket and the GPS signal input port.

2.6.1 Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes the front panel of the GRU suite. There are the following components on the frontpanel of the GRU suite: LEDs, RST button, and output ports.

Figure 2-13 shows the front panel of the GRU suite.

Figure 2-13 Front panel of the GRU suite

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-17

Page 44: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.6.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM,and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite.

Table 2-6 describes the LEDs.

Table 2-6 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green

ON for 1 s andOFF for 1 s The GRU suite works properly.

ON The power supply is normal but theGRU suite is faulty.

OFF The power supply is abnormal or theGRU suite is faulty.

ALM RedOFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT GreenON The GRU suite obtains correct

positioning information.

OFF The GRU suite cannot obtain correctpositioning information.

2.6.3 Ports on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes ports on the front panel of the GRU suite. The ports refer to PPS1, PPS2, COM1,COM2, CLK1, and CLK2.

Table 2-7 describes the ports.

Table 2-7 Ports on the front panel of the GRU suite

Name Function Type

PPS1 It outputs PPS signals and 8 kHz heartbeat signals to theWMUX/WMUXb. The 8 kHz heartbeat signals indicatewhether the GPS receiver is available.

RJ45

PPS2 It outputs PPS signals and 8 kHz heartbeat signals to theWMUX/WMUXb. The 8 kHz heartbeat signals indicatewhether the GPS receiver is available. It is standby and is usedwhen the system is configured with only one GRU suite.

RJ45

COM1 It is used to exchange management and maintenanceinformation with the WMUX/WMUXb.

RJ45

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 45: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Function Type

COM2 It is used to exchange management and maintenanceinformation with the WMUX/WMUXb. It is standby and isused when the system is configured with only one GRU suite.

RJ45

CLK1 It outputs PPS signals and work status of the clock board inthe GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc.

RJ45

CLK2 It outputs PPS signals and work status of the clock board inthe GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc. It is standby and is usedwhen the system is configured with only one GRU suite.

RJ45

2.6.4 Back Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes the back panel of the GRU suite. The components on the back panel refer to thepower input socket and the GPS signal input port.

The GRU suite is in the GRU box. Figure 2-14 shows the back panel of the GRU box.

Figure 2-14 Back panel of the GRU box

POWER: power input socket ANT: GPS signal input port

2.7 Optical Cable TrayThis describes the optical cable tray. The optical cable tray supports the optical cables that arefrom the front of the subracks to the back of the cabinet.

2.8 Cable TrayThis describes the cable tray. The WRSR shall be configured with one or two LAN switch cabletrays based on the site requirements. One cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-0 and LANSwitch-1, and the other cable tray is installed between LAN Switch-2 and LAN Switch-3. Thecable trays provide space for Ethernet cables of the two neighboring LAN switches.

When only the LAN Switch-0 and the LAN Switch-1 are configured, the cable tray for the LANSwitch-2 and the LAN Switch-3 is covered by a filler panel.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-19

Page 46: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.9 LAN SwitchThis describes the LAN switch. The LAN switch provides 10M/100M Ethernet ports, GE portsand VLAN functions for the RNC. The WRSR should be configured with two, that is LANswitch-0 and LAN switch-1, or at most four LAN switches according to the site requirements.The RNC LAN switches refer to the LAN switch (S3528G) and the LAN switch (S3928P-EI).

NOTE

l Before delivery, the LAN switch-0 and LAN switch-1 provide ten pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet portsfor operation and maintenance and fourteen pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for services. The LANswitch-2 and LAN switch-3 provide one pair of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for operation andmaintenance and twenty-three pairs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports for services. Select two or fourLAN switches according to the actual requirements such as the required number of FE ports andwhether the LAN switches for operation and maintenance and those for services should be separated.

l The LAN switches are labeled LAN Switch-0, LAN Switch-1, LAN Switch-2, and LAN Switch-3before delivery.

l For details of the LAN switch, refer to its delivery-attached documents and the RNC LAN SwitchUser Guide.

l When only LAN Switch-0 and LAN Switch-1 are configured, the subracks for LAN Switch-2 andLAN Switch-3 are covered by filler panels.

Differences Between LAN Switch (S3528G) and LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)LAN Switch (S3528G) and LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) are different in aspects such as appearanceand GE modules.

l The two types of LAN switches differ greatly in appearance. They differ in GE ports,buttons, indicators, AC, and DC power sockets.

l This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicableto the RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. For detailedspecifications, refer to 2.9.1.5 GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G).

l LAN Switch (S3928P-EI) can select any of the three SFP-GE modules: SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T-A. For detailed specifications, referto 2.9.2.5 1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI).

2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the S3528G LAN switch. The S3528G LAN switch can be configured in theWRSR cabinet.

2.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the S3928P-EI LAN switch. The S3928P-EI LAN switch can be configured inthe WRSR cabinet.

2.9.1 LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the S3528G LAN switch. The S3528G LAN switch can be configured in theWRSR cabinet.

2.9.1.1 Appearance of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the appearance of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panelof the LAN switch refer to the mode switch button, the Console port, and LEDs. The componentson the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 47: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.9.1.2 Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panelof the LAN switch are twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports (RJ45 connectors), four GigabitInterface Converter (GBIC), and one Console port.

2.9.1.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panelof the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100MEthernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports.

2.9.1.4 Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the back panelof the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt.

2.9.1.5 GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicable tothe RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. You can choosedifferent kinds of GBIC modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility.

2.9.1.6 Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3528G)The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3528G cover opticalcable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity,saturation, and center wavelength.

Appearance of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the appearance of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panelof the LAN switch refer to the mode switch button, the Console port, and LEDs. The componentson the back panel of the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt.

Figure 2-15 shows the appearance of the LAN switch.

Figure 2-15 LAN switch

Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the front panelof the LAN switch are twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports (RJ45 connectors), four GigabitInterface Converter (GBIC), and one Console port.

Figure 2-16 shows the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-21

Page 48: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-16 Front panel of the S3528G LAN switch

(1) Mode switch button (2) Power LED (PWR)

(3) Console port (4) Ethernet port state mode LED (A/L)

(5) Ethernet port state mode LED (D/S) (6) 10M/100M Ethernet ports and their LEDs

(7) GBIC module ports and their LEDs

Different kinds of GigaBit Interface Converter (GBIC) modules can be inserted in the GBICmodule ports to provide different GE ports, such as 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and1000BASE-TX.

The Console port is used for the configuration of the S3528G LAN switch. For details, refer tothe RNC Commissioning Guide.

The mode switch button is used to control the LEDs of the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to displaydifferent kinds of states.

LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panelof the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100MEthernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports.

Table 2-8 describes the LEDs.

Table 2-8 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch

Name Label Color Status Meaning

Power LED PWR Green

ON The LAN switch is powered on.

OFF The LAN switch is powered off.

Ethernet port statemode LED

A/L Green

ON orOFF

At any time, when either the A/L or theD/S LED is ON, the other LED must beOFF. If the A/L LED is ON and the D/SLED is OFF, you can infer that the 10M/100M Ethernet ports are in theACTIVE/LINK mode. If the A/L LEDis OFF and the D/S LED is ON, it is anindication that the 10M/100M Ethernetports are in the DUPLEX/SPEED mode.

D/S Green

ON orOFF

LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernetports (when A/L

None Yellow

ON There is traffic over the port.

OFF There is no traffic over the port.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 49: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Color Status Meaning

LED is on, D/SLED is off, andports are inACTIVE/LINKmode)

None Green

ON The port is in the LINK OK state(normal connection).

OFFThe port is in LINK FAULT status (noconnection) or in LINK ERROR status(connection error).

LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernetports (when A/LLED is off, D/SLED is on, andports are inDUPLEX/SPEEDmode)

None Yellow

ON The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.

OFF The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.

None Green

ON The port provides the rate of 100 Mbit/s.

OFF The port provides the rate of 10 Mbit/s.

LED of GBICmodule port

ACT Yellow

ON There is traffic over the port.

OFF There is no traffic over the port.

LINK Green

ON A GBIC module is inserted in the port.

OFF No GBIC module is inserted in the port.

NOTE

After the S3528G LAN switch is powered on and initialized, the Ethernet port state mode LED A/L is onand the LED D/S is off. You can infer that the 10 M/100 M Ethernet ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode.

Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The components on the back panelof the LAN switch refer to the DC power socket and the grounding bolt.

Figure 2-17 shows the back panel of the S3528G LAN switch.

Figure 2-17 Back panel of the S3528G LAN switch

(1) DC power socket (2) Grounding bolt

GBIC Module Ports on the LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes GBIC modules on the S3528G LAN switch. The GBIC modules applicable tothe RNC are GBIC-SX-MM850-A, GBIC-LX-SM1310-A, and GBIC-T-A. You can choosedifferent kinds of GBIC modules to insert in the ports, which enhances the networking flexibility.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-23

Page 50: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-9 describes the GBIC modules that are applicable to the RNC.

Table 2-9 GBIC modules applicable to the RNC

Name Port Type Cable TypeMaximumTransmissionDistance

GBIC-SX-MM850-A SC (optical

port)

50 μm/125 μm multi-mode optical cable 550 m

GBIC-LX-SM1310-A

Single-mode opticalcable 10 Km

GBIC-T-ARJ45(electricalport)

Twisted pair cable 100 m

Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3528G)

The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3528G cover opticalcable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity,saturation, and center wavelength.

The LAN switch S3528G supports the following types of Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC)module:l GBIC-SX-MM850-A

l GBIC-LX-SM1310-A

l GBIC-T-A

GBIC-SX-MM850-A and GBIC-LX-SM1310-A provide GE optical ports, and GBIC-T-Aprovides GE electrical ports.

Table 2-10 describes the specifications for optical ports on the GBIC modules.

Table 2-10 Specifications for optical ports on LAN switches (S3528G)

Item GBIC-SX-MM850-A GBIC-LX-SM1310-A

Optical cable mode Multi-mode Single-mode

Connector type SC/PC SC/PC

Transmission distance < 550 m < 10 km

Output optical power –9.5 dBm to –3.0 dBm –9.5 dBm to –3.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –17.0 dBm ≤ –19.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –3.0 dBm ≤ –3.0 dBm

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 51: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.9.2 LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the S3928P-EI LAN switch. The S3928P-EI LAN switch can be configured inthe WRSR cabinet.

2.9.2.1 Appearance of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the appearance of the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). The front panel of LAN switchS3928P-E1 provides multiple ports, LEDs, and a button, while the back panel provides the ACand DC power sockets and a grounding bolt.

2.9.2.2 Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the front panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The LAN switch provides twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports, that is RJ45 connectors, four 1000Base-X SFP ports, one consoleport, one mode switch button, one digital display indicator, and other status indicators on thefront panel.

2.9.2.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the powerLED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports.

2.9.2.4 Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the back panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The AC power socket, the DCpower socket, and the PGND grounding bolt are located on the back panel of the LAN switch.

2.9.2.5 1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI)This describes the 1000Base-X SFP port (S3928P-EI). The 1000Base-X SFP modules applicableto the RNC are SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T. You canchoose different kinds of 1000Base-X SFP modules to insert in the ports, which enhances thenetworking flexibility.

2.9.2.6 Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3928P-EI)The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3928P-EI coveroptical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiversensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.

Appearance of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the appearance of the LAN switch (S3928P-EI). The front panel of LAN switchS3928P-E1 provides multiple ports, LEDs, and a button, while the back panel provides the ACand DC power sockets and a grounding bolt.

Figure 2-18 shows the appearance of the LAN switch.

Figure 2-18 LAN switch

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-25

Page 52: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the front panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The LAN switch provides twenty-four 10M/100M Ethernet ports, that is RJ45 connectors, four 1000Base-X SFP ports, one consoleport, one mode switch button, one digital display indicator, and other status indicators on thefront panel.

Figure 2-19 shows the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.

Figure 2-19 Front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch

(1) 10M/100M Ethernet ports and their LEDs (2) 1000Base-X SFP ports and their LEDs

(3) DC Power LED (PWR) (4) Power LED (PWR)

(5) Mode status LED (6) Mode switch button

(7) Digital display LED (8) Console port

(9) 1000Base-X SFP port (10) 10M/100M Ethernet port

Different kinds of SFP modules can be inserted in the SFP module ports to provide different GEports, such as 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-TX.

You can perform local or remote configuration for the LAN switch through the console port.For details, refer to the RNC Commissioning Guide.

The mode switch button is used to control the information status of LEDs at the LAN switchports of different kinds.

LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)

This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the powerLED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports.

Table 2-11 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.

Table 2-11 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch

Name Label Status Meaning

Power LED PWR

Green; ON The LAN switch isoperational.

Green; Flash at 1 HzAfter the system is poweredon, it is in self-test state or isdownloading software.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 53: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

Red; ONAfter the system is poweredon, the self-test fails and thesystem is faulty.

Yellow; Flash at 1 HzAfter the system is poweredon, some ports fail to performthe self-test.

OFF The LAN switch is poweredoff.

DC PowerLED(PWR)

RPS

Green; ONThe DC power supply and theinternal AC power areoperational.

Yellow; ON

The AC power supply is faultyor is disconnected, and theinternal DC power isoperational.

OFF The DC power supply is notconnected.

DigitaldisplayLED

Unit

Duringtheself-test

The PWR LED isgreen and flashing.

The self-test items from one tonine are displayed.

If theself-testfails,

The PWR LED isyellow and flashing. The failed self-test items are

displayed.The PWR LED is redand on.

Softwareloading

The PWR LED isgreen and flashing.

During the software loading, astub is rotating clockwise.

Fanfailure

The PWR LED is redand on. The letter F is displayed.

Unit id Do not press thebutton.

The unit ID of the Fabric portis displayed. If the system isoperational alone, the number1 is displayed.

Modestatus LED Mode Green; ON

Rate mode. The rate of the 10Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port,1000 Mbit/s SFP port, orFabric port that uses 1000Mbit/s SFP

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-27

Page 54: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

Yellow; ON Duplex mode. The duplexinformation about the 10Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port,1000 Mbit/s SFP port, orFabric port that uses 1000Mbit/s SFP

10Base-T/100Base-TX portLED

None

Ratemode

Green; ON The rate of the port is 100Mbit/s.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON The rate of the port is 10 Mbit/s.

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

Duplexmode

Green; ON The 10M/100M port works infull-duplex mode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON The 10M/100M port works inhalf duplex mode.

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFFThe 10M/100M port is neitherreceiving nor transmittingdata.

1000Base-X SFP portLED

None Ratemode

Green; ON The rate of the port is 1000Mbit/s.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 55: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

Duplexmode

Green; ON The 10M/100M port works infull-duplex mode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

PoEmode

Green; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF -

LED of the1000Base-X SFP portwhen the1000Base-X SFP portis set toFabricmode

None

Ratemode

Green; ON

The 1000Base-X SFP port isreceiving or transmitting data.The equipment is in IRF ringmode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON

The 1000Base-X SFP port isreceiving or transmitting data.The equipment is in IRF linkmode.

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Green; Flash at 3 Hz The Fabric port is faulty.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

Duplexmode

Green; ONThe 1000Base-X SFP portworks in full-duplex Fabricmode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

PoEmode Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails to

perform the self-test.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-29

Page 56: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

OFFThe 10M/100M port is neitherreceiving nor transmittingdata.

Back Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the back panel of the LAN switch S3928P-EI. The AC power socket, the DCpower socket, and the PGND grounding bolt are located on the back panel of the LAN switch.

Figure 2-20 shows the back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.

Figure 2-20 Back panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch

(1) AC power socket (2) DC power socket (3) Grounding bolt

1000Base-X SFP Port (S3928P-EI)This describes the 1000Base-X SFP port (S3928P-EI). The 1000Base-X SFP modules applicableto the RNC are SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A, SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A, and SFP-GE-T. You canchoose different kinds of 1000Base-X SFP modules to insert in the ports, which enhances thenetworking flexibility.

Table 2-12 describes the 1000Base-X SFP modules that are applicable to the RNC.

Table 2-12 1000Base-X SFP modules applicable to the RNC

Name Port Type Cable TypeMaximumTransmissionDistance

SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A

LC (opticalport) Single-mode optical cable 10 Km

SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A

LC (opticalport) Multi-mode optical cable 550 m

SFP-GE-TRJ45(electricalport)

Twisted pair cable 100 m

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 57: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Specifications for Optical Ports on LAN Switches (S3928P-EI)The specifications for the optical ports on the LAN switch whose model is S3928P-EI coveroptical cable mode, connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiversensitivity, saturation, and center wavelength.

The LAN switch S3928P-EI supports the following types of Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP)module:l SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A

l SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A

l SFP-GE-T

SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A and SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A provide GE optical ports, and SFP-GE-Tprovides GE electrical ports.

Table 2-13 describes the specifications for optical ports on the SFP modules.

Table 2-13 Specifications for optical ports on the LAN switches (S3928P-EI)

Item SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A

Optical cable mode Multi-mode Single-mode

Connector type LC LC

Transmission distance < 550 m < 10 km

Output optical power –9.5 dBm to 0 dBm –9.5 dBm to –3.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –17.0 dBm ≤ –20.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –3.0 dBm ≤ –3.0 dBm

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

2.10 BAM ServerThis describes the BAM server. The RNC BAM server can use either the IBM X343-8847 orthe IBM X3650T. The RNC is configured with one BAM server (single-server system) or twoBAM servers (dual-server system) according to the site requirements. The BAM servers areinstalled at the bottom of the WRSR.

The BAM servers are labeled before delivery. In the WRSR, the BAM server labeled asBAM_Upper shall be installed above the BAM server labeled as BAM_Lower. At theinstallation, you can set either of the two BAM servers as the active one and the other the standbyone. During the running, the active and the standby can be switched over.

For details of the BAM server, refer to its delivery-attached documents and the RNC BAMAdministration Guide.

2.10.1 Functions of BAMIn the RNC OM subsystem, the BAM works as a bridge between the Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT) and the Front Administration Module (FAM).

2.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-31

Page 58: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes the appearance of the IBM server X3650T. The IBM X3650T has a differentappearance from the IBM X343-8847.

2.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)This describes the appearance of the IBM server X343-8847. The IBM X343-8847 has a differentappearance from the IBM X3650T.

2.10.1 Functions of BAMIn the RNC OM subsystem, the BAM works as a bridge between the Local MaintenanceTerminal (LMT) and the Front Administration Module (FAM).

BAM performs the following functions:

l Providing FAM with such functions as configuration management, performancemanagement, fault management, security management, and loading management.

l Providing the M2000/LMT with the RNC OM interface and controlling communicationsbetween the M2000/LMT and the RNC host.

Figure 2-21 shows the position of the BAM in the OM subsystem.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 59: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-21 Logical structure of OM subsystem

NOTE

The WINT shown in Figure 2-21 is not a concrete board. Instead, the WINT is a general name of all theinterface boards in the WRBS. As required, the WINT boards can be WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFEE, or WFIE.

2.10.2 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)This describes the appearance of the IBM server X3650T. The IBM X3650T has a differentappearance from the IBM X343-8847.

Figure 2-22 shows the appearance of the BAM server (IBM X3650T).

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-33

Page 60: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-22 BAM server (IBM X3650T)

2.10.2.1 Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)This describes the front panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the front panelof the IBM Server X3650T refer to the CD-RW drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches.

2.10.2.2 Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)This describes the back panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the back panel ofthe IBM server X3650T refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, andports.

Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)This describes the front panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the front panelof the IBM Server X3650T refer to the CD-RW drive, LEDs, ports, connectors, and switches.

Figure 2-23 shows the front panel of the BAM server.

Figure 2-23 Front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)

Table 2-14 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server.

Table 2-14 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)

No. Silk-Screen Mark Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 61: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

No. Silk-Screen Mark Description

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication.When the LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that acritical fault occurs in the system and the system cannotwork properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that amajor fault occurs in the system. The system can stillwork properly with the performance deterioratedsignificantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication that aminor fault occurs in the system. The system can stillwork properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication thatthe power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector. This port is notused in the RNC.

9 USB port

10 0 Disk 0 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty.

11 1 Disk 1 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty.

12 ON Main power LED

13 NIC NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

14 ID System ID LED

15 ID ID switch, used to switch system IDs

16 None Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) switch. When the NMIswitch is pressed, the system is in suspended status fordiagnosing faults.

Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X3650T)This describes the back panel of the IBM server X3650T. The components on the back panel ofthe IBM server X3650T refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt, connectors, andports.

Figure 2-24 shows the back panel of the BAM server.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-35

Page 62: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-24 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)

Table 2-15 describes the silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server.

Table 2-15 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X3650T)

No. Silk-ScreenMark

Description

1 Alarms DB15 port

2 None PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)

3 None PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)

4 None 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet port

5 None Power supply module

6 PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for themouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.

7 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

8 1 RJ45 NIC 1 port

9 2 RJ45 NIC 2 port

10 Monitor interface

11 1 USB port 1

(12) 0 USB port 0

13 Server management port

14 Ultra320 SCSI port

15 Grounding bolt

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 63: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.10.3 Appearance of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)This describes the appearance of the IBM server X343-8847. The IBM X343-8847 has a differentappearance from the IBM X3650T.

Figure 2-25 shows the appearance of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847).

Figure 2-25 BAM server (IBM X343-8847)

2.10.3.1 Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)This describes the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847). The components on thefront panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the CD-ROM drive, LEDs, ports, connectors,and switches.

2.10.3.2 Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)This describes the back panel of the IBM X343-8847 BAM server. The components on the backpanel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt,connectors, and ports.

Front Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)This describes the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847). The components on thefront panel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the CD-ROM drive, LEDs, ports, connectors,and switches.

Figure 2-26 shows the front panel of the BAM server.

Figure 2-26 Front panel of the BAM server

Table 2-16 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-37

Page 64: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-16 Silkscreens on the front panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847)

No. Silk-Screen Mark Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication.When the LED is on (yellow), it is an indication thata critical fault occurs in the system and the systemcannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication thata major fault occurs in the system. The system canstill work properly with the performancedeteriorated significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication thata minor fault occurs in the system. The system canstill work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it is an indication thatthe power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector (This port isnot used in the RNC).

9 USB connectors

10

11 0 Disk 0 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty.

12 1 Disk 1 activity LED. Green: normal; yellow: faulty.

13 ON Main power LED

14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15 System ID LED

16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17 None NMI switch. When the NMI switch is pressed, thesystem is in suspended status to diagnose faults.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 65: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Back Panel of the BAM Server (IBM X343-8847)

This describes the back panel of the IBM X343-8847 BAM server. The components on the backpanel of the IBM Server X343-8847 refer to the DC input power socket, grounding bolt,connectors, and ports.

Figure 2-27 shows the back panel of the BAM server.

Figure 2-27 Back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847)

Table 2-17 describes the silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server.

Table 2-17 Silkscreens on the back panel of the BAM server (IBM X343-8847)

No. Silk-ScreenMark

Description

1 USB port 1

2 Monitor port

3 Ultra320 SCSI port

4 RJ45 NIC 1 port

5 Integrated interface for mouse and keyboard. You can usea Y-type cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to theserver.

6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector

7 USB port 2

8 None 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet port

9 Grounding bolt

10 None DC input power socket. The socket – is for receiving the –48 V input while socket + is for receiving the GND input.

11 Alarms DB15 port

12 RJ45 NIC 0 port

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-39

Page 66: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

2.11 Cable Connections in the WRSR CabinetThis describes the cable connections in the WRSR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRSRcabinet refers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable.

2.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR CabinetThis describes the layout of power switches on the WRSR cabinet. There is fixed relationbetween the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRSR cabinet and theintra-cabinet components.2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSR CabinetThis describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet. TheWRSR has four typical configuration, the WRSR may use the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-Ncabinet, and may be configured with one or two BAM servers. The connections of power cablesand PGND cables are different under the previously mentioned four conditions.2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR CabinetThis describes connections of signal cables in the WRSR cabinet. The signal cable connectionsin the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR are the same. The WRSR can be configuredwith one or two BAM servers. The cable connections in the WRSR with one BAM server isdifferent from that in the WRSR with two BAM servers. When only one BAM server isconfigured in the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper position for BAM servers.

2.11.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRSR CabinetThis describes the layout of power switches on the WRSR cabinet. There is fixed relationbetween the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRSR cabinet and theintra-cabinet components.

Figure 2-28 shows the relation between the six output power control switches on the powerdistribution box and the components of the WRSR. Table 2-18 describes the relation betweenthe power control switches and the components.

Figure 2-28 Power supply of the WRSR

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 67: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

l SERVER-1 on the front panel of the power distribution box indicates the BAM_Upper.

l SERVER-0 on the front panel of the power distribution box indicates the BAM_Lower.

Table 2-18 Relation between the power control switches and the WRSR components

Component Power Control Switch

WRSS Subrack SW1, SW4

LAN Switch-3 SW6

LAN Switch-2 SW3

Switcher SW3

KVM SW1

WRBS Subrack SW2, SW5

GRU suite SW1, SW4

LAN Switch-1 SW2

LAN Switch-0 SW3

BAM_Upper SW5

BAM_Lower SW6

2.11.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRSRCabinet

This describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet. TheWRSR has four typical configuration, the WRSR may use the N68-22 cabinet or the N68-22-Ncabinet, and may be configured with one or two BAM servers. The connections of power cablesand PGND cables are different under the previously mentioned four conditions.

Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-30 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables insidethe WRSR when the WRSR holds two BAM servers. When only one BAM server is configuredin the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper subrack for BAM servers. Only the powercables and the PGND cables of this BAM server need to be installed.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-41

Page 68: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-29 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBMX343-8847)

2.1 2.2

25

WRSS

WRSS

V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6

4.1 4.2

30

31

SW1SW2SW3SW4SW5SW6

5052

266

270

I O

27

28

29

3.23.1 9.29.1

-48V1 RTN1 MONITOR -48V2 RTN2

4.24.1

74 8

16.215.2

23

24

1.21.1 7.27.122

-48V1 RTN1 MONITOR -48V2 RTN2

6.1 6.2 8.1 8.2 10 11

5.1 5.29.19.21615 7.21.1 1.2 12 133.1 3.2 7.1

5.25.1

16.115.1

35

36

6.3

47

48

2120

34

51

53

12.1

13.2

13.112.2

10.111.110.211.2

55

57

5456

Grounding boltsunder thecabinet top

Powerdistributionbox Powerdistributionbox

Vx: -48VxBx: RTNx

Grounding bolts onthe cabinet base

Grounding bolts onthe cabinet base

Rear view Front view

WRSS

WRSS

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 69: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-30 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRSR cabinet (IBMX3650T)

Table 2-19 describes the power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-43

Page 70: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-19 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRSR

Number Cable Name

1.1, 1.2; 7.1, 7.2 Power cables of the WRSS

5.1, 5.2 Power cables of LAN Switch-3

15.1, 16.1 Power cables of LAN Switch-2

6 Power cable of the switcher

2 KVM power cables (2.1 and 74.1 are connected on thesame terminal to the grounding bolt that corresponds tothe SW1 switch.)

3.1, 3.2; 9.1, 9.2 Power cables of the WRBS

8, 74 GRU suite power cables (74.1 and 2.1 are connected onthe same terminal and 74.2 and 2.2 are connected on thesame terminal to the grounding bolt that corresponds tothe SW1 switch.)

4.1, 4.2 Power cables of LAN Switch-1

15.2, 16.2 Power cables of LAN Switch-0

10.1, 11.1; 10.2, 11.2 Power cables of the BAM server (BAM_Upper)

12.1, 13.1; 12.2, 13.2 Power cables of the BAM server (BAM_Lower)

6.3 PGND cable of the switcher

22 PGND cable of the WRSS

23 PGND cable of the WRBS

24 PGND cable of the GRU box

28, 29 PGND cables of the BAM server (BAM_Upper)

30, 31 PGND cables of the BAM server (BAM_Lower)

70 PGND cable of the KVM

35 PGND cable of LAN Switch-3

36 PGND cable of LAN Switch-2

47 PGND cable of LAN Switch-1

48 PGND cable of LAN Switch-0

34 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box andthe busbar

25 to 27 PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets

20, 21 PGND cables of the cabinet busbar

50, 51; 54, 55 PGND cables of side doors on the cabinet

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 71: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number Cable Name

52, 53; 56, 57 PGND cables of front and back doors on the cabinet

2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR CabinetThis describes connections of signal cables in the WRSR cabinet. The signal cable connectionsin the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-N WRSR are the same. The WRSR can be configuredwith one or two BAM servers. The cable connections in the WRSR with one BAM server isdifferent from that in the WRSR with two BAM servers. When only one BAM server isconfigured in the WRSR, the BAM server is installed in the upper position for BAM servers.

Figure 2-31, Figure 2-32, and Figure 2-33 show the connections of the signal cables in theWRSR that is configured with two BAM servers.

NOTE

l The WFIE and the WBIEb are presented as examples. The actual board type depends on the site plan.

l The installation positions and the quantity of the optical cables that are connected to the WLPU arepresented as examples. The actual installation positions and quantity depend on the site plan.

l The installation positions and the quantity of the trunk cables are presented as examples. The actualinstallation positions and quantity depend on the site plan.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-45

Page 72: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-31 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed)

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 73: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-32 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed)

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-47

Page 74: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 2-33 Connections of WRSR signal cables (Right view)

Table 2-20 and Table 2-21 describe the WRSR signal cables.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 75: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-20 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X343-8847 installed)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

18 Monitoringsignal cable ofthe powerdistribution box

DB15/Port COM3on the back panel ofthe powerdistribution box

DB15/Port MONITORon the back of theWRBS

-

17,73

GRU suitejumper

N/Socket on theback panel of theGRU suite for theGRU suite jumper

N/Lightning arrestoron the cabinet top

This cable isoptional. It is theaccessory of theGRU suite. Thenumber ofjumpers is thesame as that ofthe GRU suites.

76 PPS outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port PPS1 onthe front panel ofthe left GRU suite

RJ45/Port 1PPS on theWMUXb in slot 7

When the RNCis configuredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 ofcable 14 is theport PPS2 on thefront panel of theGRU suite.

14 PPS outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port PPS1 onthe front panel ofthe right GRU suite

RJ45/Port 1PPS on theWMUXb in slot 8

77 Maintenancesignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1on the front panel ofthe left GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 onthe WMUXb in slot 7

When the RNCis configuredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 ofcable 78 is portCOM2 on thefront panel of theGRU suite.

78 Maintenancesignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1on the front panel ofthe right GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 onthe WMUXb in slot 8

19 Inter- BAMserver heartbeatsignal cable

RJ45/Serial port onthe BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Serial port on theBAM server(BAM_Lower)

When the RNCuses one BAMserver, this cableis not required.

37 WMPUEthernet cable

RJ45/Ethernet portETH on the WMPUin slot 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 1on LAN Switch-0

There are printedmessages onboth ends of theEthernet cable.

38 WMPUEthernet cable

RJ45/Ethernet portETH on the WMPUin slot 0

RJ45/Ethernet port 2on LAN Switch-1

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-49

Page 76: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

39 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 7on LAN Switch-0

40 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 7on LAN Switch-1

41 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 2on LAN Switch-0

42 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 1on LAN Switch-1

43 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 8on LAN Switch-0

44 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 8on LAN Switch-1

45 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 4on LAN Switch-0

46 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 3on LAN Switch-1

49 Signal cableconnecting theKVM and theswitcher

–/Ports for thekeyboard, mouse,and monitor on theKVM

–/Ports for thekeyboard, mouse, andmonitor on the switcher

This cable is anaccessory of theKVM.

58 ExternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port6 on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 6on LAN Switch-0

This cable isused to connectthe the LANSwitch-0 and theLAN Switch-1with the externalnetwork whenthe GEconnection is notavailable. Thereare printedmessages onboth ends of theEthernet cable.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 77: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

59 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port5 on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 5on LAN Switch-0

This cable isused for theconnectionbetween theLAN Switch-0and the LANSwitch-1 in theinternal networkwhen the GEconnection is notavailable. Thereare printedmessages onboth ends of theEthernet cable.

60.2 Mouse-keyboard signalcable of BAMserver(BAM_Upper)

–/Mouse-keyboardintegrated port onBAM server(BAM_Upper)

60 The Y-shapedmouse-keyboardcable 60.2 of theBAM server andthe monitor-mouse-keyboardcable 60 of theswitcher areaccessories.

61.2 Mouse-keyboard signalcable of BAMserver(BAM_Lower)

–/Mouse-keyboardintegrated port onBAM server(BAM_Lower)

61 This Y-shapedmouse-keyboardcable 61.2 of theBAM server andthe monitor-mouse-keyboardcable 61 of theswitcher areaccessories.

60 Monitor-mouse-keyboard cableof the switcher

–/Serial port 2 onthe back panel ofthe switcher

60.1, 60.2 -

61 Monitor-mouse-keyboard cableof the switcher

–/Serial port 1 onthe back panel ofthe switcher

61.1, 61.2 -

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-51

Page 78: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

71 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port4 on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 1on LAN Switch-3

This cable isused to connectthe LANSwitch-1 and theLAN Switch-3with the internalnetwork so as tomonitor andmanage the LANSwitch-3. Thereare printedmessages onboth ends of theEthernet cable.

72 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port3 on LAN Switch-0

RJ45/Ethernet port 1on LAN Switch-2

This cable isused to connectthe LANSwitch-0 and theLAN Switch-2with the internalnetwork so as tomonitor andmanage the LANSwitch-2. Thereare printedmessages onboth ends of theEthernet cable.

79 Ethernet cableof the LMT

RJ45/Ethernet porton the LMT orEthernet port on thehub

RJ45/Ethernet port 9on LAN Switch-0

The connectorsneed to beprepared on site.The informationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

80 Ethernet cableof the LMT

RJ45/Ethernet porton the LMT orEthernet port on thehub

RJ45/Ethernet port 9on LAN Switch-1

The connectorsneed to beprepared on site.The informationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 79: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

81 Clock outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK1on the front panel ofthe left GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK IN0 onthe WNET/WNETc inslot 7

When the RNCis configuredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 ofcable 82 is theport CLK2 onthe front panel ofthe GRU suite.

82 Clock outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK1on the front panel ofthe right GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK IN0 onthe WNET/WNETc inslot 8

83 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Opticalports TX and RX onthe WMUXb in slot7

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 4

The slot numberand optical portnumber arepresented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions of theoptical cablesdepend on thesite plan.

84 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Opticalports TX and RX onthe WMUXb in slot8

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 5

87 BITS clockcable

SMB/BITS clocksource

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orport CLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot7

The cable isoptional. It isused only whenthe RNC uses theBITS clock asthe clock source.This part takesport CLK IN2 asan example. Theinformation hereis an examplebased onoverheadcabling.

88 BITS clockcable

SMB/BITS clocksource

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orport CLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot8

89 Ethernet cableconnecting theWFEE/WFIE tothe LAN switch

RJ45/FE port on theWFEE/WFIE inslot 0 in subrack 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 11on LAN Switch-0

The ports on theWFEEs/WFIEsare presented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions of theEthernet cablesdepend on thesite plan. TheWFEEs/WFIEs

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-53

Page 80: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

90 Ethernet cableconnecting theWFEE/WFIE tothe LAN switch

RJ45/FE port on theWFEE/WFIE inslot 0 in subrack 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 12on LAN Switch-0

can also beconnected toanother devicedirectly and theactualinstallationpositions dependon the site plan.When theWFEEs/WFIEsare connected toanother devicethrough the LANswitches, theWFEEs/WFIEsare connected tothe LANswitches, asdescribed inTable 2-22.

91 Trunk cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE toanother device

Trunk cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc//WEIE/WFEEelectrical port

–/Another device The electricalport here ispresented as anexample. Theactualinstallationposition dependson the site plan.The informationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 81: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

92 Clock cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc and theWNET/WNETc

SMB/Port CLK1on the WBIEb/WOSEc in slot 15

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orCLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot8

The clock cableis optional. It isused only whenthe RNCreceives timingsignals from theWBIEb/WOSEc. Thispart takes portCLK IN2 as anexample.

93 GE cableconnectingLAN switches

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 onLAN Switch-0

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 on LANSwitch-1

This cable isused to connectLAN switcheswhen the WFEE/WFIE uses theLAN switches toconverge datastreams on theFE ports. Youcan chooseoptical cables orEthernet cablesaccording to theconfigurations ofthe LANswitches. Theinformation hereis an examplebased on opticalcables.

94 GE cableconnectingLAN switches

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 onLAN Switch-2

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 on LANSwitch-3

1 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb in theWRBR to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Opticalports TX and RX onthe WMUXb in slot7 in subrack 3

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 2

The subracknumber, slotnumber andoptical portnumber arepresented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions of theoptical cabledepend on thesite plan. Theoptical cableruns through theoptical cable tray

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-55

Page 82: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

2 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb in theWRBR to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Opticalports TX and RX onthe WMUXb in slot8 in subrack 3

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 3

to the back of thecabinet. Thesurplus part ofthe optical cableneeds to becoiled up in theoptical cable boxat the back of thecabinet. Theinformation hereis an examplebased onoverheadcabling.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 83: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

3 Optical cableconnecting theWLPU in theWRSS toanother device

LC/PC/Optical porton the WLPU inslot 9

–/Another device The slot number,optical portnumber andoptical port typeare presented asan example. Theactualinstallationpositions of theoptical cabledepend on thesite plan. Theconnector typedepends on thesite plan. Theoptical cableruns through theoptical cable trayto the back of thecabinet. Thesurplus part ofthe optical cableneeds to becoiled up in theoptical cable boxat the back of thecabinet. Theinformation hereis an examplebased onoverheadcabling.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-57

Page 84: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

4-7 CablesconnectingLAN switchesand anotherdevice

SC/PC LC/PC orRJ45/Port 26 on theLAN Switch-0,LAN Switch-1,LAN Switch-2, orLAN Switch-3.

–/Another device The cables areused to connectLAN switches toa device whenthe WFIEsconnect to thedevice throughthe LANswitches. Youcan chooseoptical cables orEthernet cablesaccording to theconfigurations ofthe LANswitches. Theinformation hereis an examplebased on opticalcables andoverheadcabling.

Table 2-21 Connections of the WRSR signal cables (With IBM Server X3650T installed)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

18 Monitoringsignal cable ofthe powerdistribution box

DB15/Port COM3on the back panel ofthe powerdistribution box

DB15/Port MONITORon the back of theWRBS

-

17, 73 GRU suitejumper

N/Socket on theback panel of theGRU suite for theGRU suite jumper

N/Lightning arrestor onthe cabinet top

This cable isoptional. It isthe accessoryof the GRUsuite. Thenumber ofjumpers is thesame as that ofthe GRUsuites.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 85: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

76 PPS outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port PPS1 onthe front panel of theleft GRU suite

RJ45/Port 1PPS on theWMUXb in slot 7

When theRNC isconfiguredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 ofcable 14 is theport PPS2 onthe front panelof the GRUsuite.

14 PPS outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port PPS1 onthe front panel of theright GRU suite

RJ45/Port 1PPS on theWMUXb in slot 8

77 Maintenancesignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 onthe front panel of theleft GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 on theWMUXb in slot 7

When theRNC isconfiguredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 ofcable 78 is portCOM2 on thefront panel ofthe GRU suite.

78 Maintenancesignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 onthe front panel of theright GRU suite

RJ45/Port COM1 on theWMUXb in slot 8

19 Inter-serverheartbeat signalcable

RJ45/Serial port onthe BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Serial port on theBAM server(BAM_Lower)

When theRNC uses oneBAM server,this cable isnot required.

37 WMPUEthernet cable

RJ45/Ethernet portETH on the WMPUin slot 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 1 onLAN Switch-0

There areprintedmessages onboth ends ofthe Ethernetcable.

38 WMPUEthernet cable

RJ45/Ethernet portETH on the WMPUin slot 0

RJ45/Ethernet port 2 onLAN Switch-1

39 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 7 onLAN Switch-0

40 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 7 onLAN Switch-1

41 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 2 onLAN Switch-0

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-59

Page 86: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

42 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Lower)

RJ45/Ethernet port 1 onLAN Switch-1

43 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 8 onLAN Switch-0

44 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 8 onLAN Switch-1

45 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 4 onLAN Switch-0

46 Ethernet cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet porton BAM server(BAM_Upper)

RJ45/Ethernet port 3 onLAN Switch-1

49 Signal cableconnecting theKVM and theswitcher

–/Ports for thekeyboard, mouse,and monitor on theKVM

–/Ports for thekeyboard, mouse, andmonitor on the switcher

This cable isan accessoryof the KVM.

58 ExternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port 6on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 6 onLAN Switch-0

This cable isused to theconnect theLAN Switch-0and the LANSwitch-1 withthe externalnetwork whenthe GEconnection isnot available.There areprintedmessages onboth ends ofthe Ethernetcable.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 87: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

59 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port 5on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 5 onLAN Switch-0

This cable isused toconnect theLAN Switch-0and the LANSwitch-1 withthe internalnetwork whenthe GEconnection isnot available.There areprintedmessages onboth ends ofthe Ethernetcable.

60 Monitor-mouse-keyboard cableof the switcher

–/Serial port 2 on theback panel of theswitcher

Port for the mouse-keyboard signal cableof BAM server(BAM_Upper)

Monitor-mouse-keyboardcable 60 of theswitcher

61 Monitor-mouse-keyboard cableof the switcher

–/Serial port 1 on theback panel of theswitcher

Port for the mouse-keyboard signal cableof BAM server(BAM_Lower)

Monitor-mouse-keyboardcable 61 of theswitcher

71 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port 4on LAN Switch-1

RJ45/Ethernet port 1 onLAN Switch-3

This cable isused for theconnectionbetween theLAN Switch-1and the LANSwitch-3 in theinternalnetwork tomonitor andmanage theLANSwitch-3.There areprintedmessages onboth ends ofthe Ethernetcable.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-61

Page 88: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

72 InternalcascadingEthernet cableof the LANswitch

RJ45/Ethernet port 3on LAN Switch-0

RJ45/Ethernet port 1 onLAN Switch-2

This cable isused for theconnectionbetween theLAN Switch-0and the LANSwitch-2 in theinternalnetwork tomonitor andmanage theLANSwitch-2.There areprintedmessages onboth ends ofthe Ethernetcable.

79 Ethernet cableof the LMT

RJ45/Ethernet porton the LMT orEthernet port on thehub

RJ45/Ethernet port 9 onLAN Switch-0

Theconnectorsneed to beprepared onsite. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

80 Ethernet cableof the LMT

RJ45/Ethernet porton the LMT orEthernet port on thehub

RJ45/Ethernet port 9 onLAN Switch-1

Theconnectorsneed to beprepared onsite. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

81 Clock outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK1 onthe front panel of theleft GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK IN0 onthe WNET/WNETc inslot 7

When theRNC isconfiguredwith one GRUsuite, theconnectionposition 1 of

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 89: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

82 Clock outputsignal cable ofthe GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK1 onthe front panel of theright GRU suite

RJ45/Port CLK IN0 onthe WNET/WNETc inslot 8

cable 82 is theport CLK2 onthe front panelof the GRUsuite.

83 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Optical portsTX and RX on theWMUXb in slot 7

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 4

The slotnumber andoptical portnumber arepresented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions ofthe opticalcables dependon the siteplan.

84 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Optical portsTX and RX on theWMUXb in slot 8

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 5

87 BITS clockcable

SMB/BITS clocksource

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orport CLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot7

The cables areoptional. Theyare used onlywhen the RNCuses the BITSclock as theclock source.This part takesport CLK IN2as an example.Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

88 BITS clockcable

SMB/BITS clocksource

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orport CLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot8

89 Ethernet cableconnecting theWFEE/WFIE tothe LAN switch

RJ45/FE port on theWFEE/WFIE in slot0 in subrack 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 11on LAN Switch-0

The ports onthe WFEEs/WFIEs arepresented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions ofthe Ethernet

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-63

Page 90: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

90 Ethernet cableconnecting theWFEE/WFIE tothe LAN switch

RJ45/FE port on theWFEE/WFIE in slot0 in subrack 1

RJ45/Ethernet port 12on LAN Switch-0

cables dependon the siteplan. TheWFEEs/WFIEs canalso connect toanother devicedirectly andthe actualinstallationpositionsdepend on thesite plan. If theWFEEs/WFIEsconnect toanother devicethrough theLAN switches,connect theWFEEs/WFIEs to theLAN switchesas described inTable 2-22.

91 Trunk cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE toanother device

Trunk cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc//WEIE/WFEEelectrical port

–/Another device The electricalport here ispresented as anexample. Theactualinstallationpositiondepends on thesite plan. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 91: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

92 Clock cableconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc and theWNET/WNETc

SMB/Port CLK1 onthe WBIEb/WOSEcin slot 15

SMB/Port CLK IN2 orCLK IN3 on theWNET/WNETc in slot8

The clockcable isoptional. It isused onlywhen the RNCreceivestiming signalsfrom theWBIEb/WOSEc. Thispart takes portCLK IN2 as anexample.

93 GE cableconnectingLAN switches

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 onLAN Switch-0

SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/Port 25 on LANSwitch-1

This cable isused toconnect LANswitches whenWFEE/WFIEuses the LANswitches toconverge datastreams on theFE ports. Youcan chooseoptical cablesor Ethernetcablesaccording totheconfigurationsof the LANswitches. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon opticalcables.

94 GE cableconnectingLAN switches

SC/PC, LC/PC orRJ45/Port 25 onLAN Switch-2

SC/PC, LC/PC or RJ45/Port 25 on LANSwitch-3

1 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb in theWRBR to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Optical portsTX and RX on theWMUXb in slot 7 insubrack 3

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 2

The subracknumber, slotnumber andoptical portnumber arepresented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions of

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-65

Page 92: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

2 Optical cableconnecting theWMUXb in theWRBR to theWLPU in theWRSR

the opticalcable dependon the siteplan. Theoptical cableruns throughthe opticalcable tray tothe back of thecabinet. Thesurplus part ofthe opticalcable needs tobe coiled up inthe opticalcable box atthe back of thecabinet. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

SC/PC/Optical portsTX and RX on theWMUXb in slot 8 insubrack 3

LC/PC/Optical port onthe WLPU in slot 3

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 93: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

3 Optical cableconnecting theWLPU in theWRSS toanother device

LC/PC/Optical porton the WLPU in slot9

–/Another device The slotnumber,optical portnumber andoptical porttype arepresented as anexample. Theactualinstallationpositions ofthe opticalcable dependon the siteplan. Theconnector typedepends on thesite plan. Theoptical cableruns throughthe opticalcable tray tothe back of thecabinet. Thesurplus part ofthe opticalcable needs tobe coiled up inthe opticalcable box atthe back of thecabinet. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-67

Page 94: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number

Cable Name Connector Type 1/ConnectionPosition 2

Connector Type 2/Connection Position2

Remarks

4-7 CablesconnectingLAN switchesand anotherdevice

LC/PC SC/PC orRJ45/Port 26 on theLAN Switch-0,LAN Switch-1,LAN Switch-2, orLAN Switch-3.

–/Another device The cables areused toconnect LANswitches to adevice whenthe WFIEsconnect to thedevice throughthe LANswitches. Youcan chooseoptical cablesor Ethernetcablesaccording totheconfigurationsof the LANswitches. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon opticalcables andoverheadcabling.

Table 2-22 describes the connection between the WFEEs/WFIEs and the LAN switches whenthe WRSR is in full configuration and in the assumption that the WRBSs all use LAN switchesto converge data streams on the FE ports.

NOTE

The WFIE and the ports on the WFIE are presented as examples. The actual installation positions of theEthernet cables depend on the site plan. The WFEEs/WFIEs can also connect to another device directlyand the actual installation positions depend on the site plan.

Table 2-22 Connection between the WFIE and the LAN switches

Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

SubrackNo.

SlotNo.

FEPort

LANSwitch

Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch

Subrack 1 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 11

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 12

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 95: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

SubrackNo.

SlotNo.

FEPort

LANSwitch

Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 11

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 12

Subrack 3 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 13

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 14

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 13

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 14

Subrack 4 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 15

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 16

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 15

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 16

Subrack 5 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 17

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 18

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 17

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 18

Subrack 6 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 19

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 20

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 19

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 20

Subrack 7 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 21

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 22

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 21

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 22

Subrack 8 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-0

Ethernet port 23

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 24

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-1

Ethernet port 23

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 24

Subrack 9 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 7

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 8

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-69

Page 96: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

SubrackNo.

SlotNo.

FEPort

LANSwitch

Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 7

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 8

Subrack 10 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 9

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 10

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 9

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 10

Subrack 11 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 11

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 12

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 11

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 12

Subrack 12 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 13

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 14

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 13

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 14

Subrack 13 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 15

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 16

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 15

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 16

Subrack 14 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 17

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 18

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 17

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 18

Subrack 15 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 19

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 20

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 19

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 20

Subrack 16 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 21

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 22

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 97: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

SubrackNo.

SlotNo.

FEPort

LANSwitch

Ethernet Port No. of LAN Switch

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 21

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 22

Subrack 17 Slot 0 FE 0 LANSwitch-2

Ethernet port 23

Slot 0 FE 1 Ethernet port 24

Slot 15 FE 0 LANSwitch-3

Ethernet port 23

Slot 15 FE 1 Ethernet port 24

2.12 Engineering Specifications for the WRSR CabinetThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRSR cabinet. The engineeringspecifications for the N68-22 WRSR and N68-22-N WRSR include structural specifications andelectrical specifications.

Table 2-23 describes the structural specifications of the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-NWRSR.

NOTE

The empty cabinet refers to a rack installed with only front, back and side doors.

Table 2-23 Structural specifications of the WRSR

Item Specification

Dimension 2200 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 800 mm (D)

Usable space height N68-22:46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)N68-22-N:45 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Weight N68-22:Rack ≤ 75 kg; Empty cabinet ≤ 130 kg; Fully-configured cabinet ≤ 350 kgN68-22-N:Rack: ≤ 105 kg; empty cabinet ≤ 170 kg; fully-configured cabinet ≤ 350 kg

Floor bearing weight ≥450 kg/m2

RNCHardware Description 2 WRSR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-71

Page 98: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 2-24 describes the electrical specifications of the N68-22 WRSR and the N68-22-NWRSR.

Table 2-24 Electrical specifications of the WRSR

Item Specification

Power supply Rated input voltage: -48 V DC; Input voltage range: -40 V DCto -57 V DC

Electromagneticcompatibility

Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.3.1 (2001-09).

Power consumption in fullconfiguration

≤ 2600 W

Heat dissipation ≤2080W

2 WRSR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

2-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 99: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

3 WRBR Cabinet

About This Chapter

This describes the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR performs the service processing function of theRNC. It is optional. The RNC can be configured with zero to five WRBRs as required.

3.1 Appearance of RNC CabinetsThis describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22-N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance.

3.2 Components of the WRBR CabinetThis describes the components of the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the samewhile the internal configurations are slightly different.

3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR CabinetThis describes the cable connections in the WRBR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRBRrefers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable.

3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR CabinetThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRBR cabinet. The engineeringspecifications for the N68-22 and N68-22-N WRBR include structural specifications andelectrical specifications.

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-1

Page 100: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

3.1 Appearance of RNC CabinetsThis describes the appearance of RNC cabinets. The RNC uses the Huawei N68-22 and N68-22-N cabinets. The two models of cabinets have the same appearance.

The appearance of the RNC cabinet is shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 N68-22/N68-22-N cabinet

3.2 Components of the WRBR CabinetThis describes the components of the WRBR cabinet. The WRBR can use either the N68-22cabinet or the N68-22-N cabinet. The components of the two types of cabinets are the samewhile the internal configurations are slightly different.

3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22)This describes components of the N68-22 WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, the WRBS, and optical cable tray.

3.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N)This describes components of the N68-22-N WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, WRBS, and optical cable tray.

3.2.1 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22)This describes components of the N68-22 WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, the WRBS, and optical cable tray.

Figure 3-2 shows the assembly of the N68-22 WRBR.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 101: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-2 N68-22 WRBR assembly diagram (front view)

(1) Filler panel (2) Optical cable tray

(3) WRBS (4) Power distribution box

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-3

Page 102: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe N68-22 WRBR is 46U high inside. There is a 1 U filler panel at the bottom of the N68-22WRBR.

Table 3-1 describes the configuration of the WRBR.

Table 3-1 WRBR configuration

Component Configuration Refer to ...

Powerdistribution box

1, mandatory 2.3 RNC Power DistributionBox

WRBS 1 to 3, mandatory 5 WRBS Subrack

Optical cable tray 1, mandatory 2.7 Optical Cable Tray

3.2.2 Components of the WRBR Cabinet (N68-22-N)This describes components of the N68-22-N WRBR cabinet. The components refer to the powerdistribution box, WRBS, and optical cable tray.

Figure 3-3 shows an assembly of the N68-22-N WRBR.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 103: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-3 N68-22-N WRBR assembly diagram (front view)

(1) Optical cable tray (2) WRBS (3) Power distribution box

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-5

Page 104: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe N68-22-N WRBR is 45U high inside. There is no filler panel at the bottom of the N68-22-N WRBR.

Table 3-2 describes the configuration of the WRBR.

Table 3-2 WRBR configuration

Component Configuration Refer to ...

Powerdistribution box

1, mandatory 2.3 RNC Power DistributionBox

WRBS 1 to 3, mandatory 5 WRBS Subrack

Optical cable tray 1, mandatory 2.7 Optical Cable Tray

3.3 Cable Connections in the WRBR CabinetThis describes the cable connections in the WRBR cabinet. The cable distribution of the WRBRrefers to the connections of the power cable, PGND cable, and signal cable.

3.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR CabinetThis describes the layout of power switches on the WRBR cabinet. There is a fixed relationshipbetween the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRBR and the intra-cabinet components.

3.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBR CabinetThe connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68-22 cabinet are different fromthose in the N68-22-N cabinet.

3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR CabinetThis describes connections of signal cables in the WRBR cabinet. The signal cables in the WRBRinclude the following: the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, the opticalcables connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR, the optical cablesconnecting the WOSEc in the WRBS to another device, the trunk cables connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to another device, and the Ethernet cables connecting theWFEEs/WFIEs in the WRBR to the LAN switches in the WRSR.

3.3.1 Layout of Power Switches on the WRBR CabinetThis describes the layout of power switches on the WRBR cabinet. There is a fixed relationshipbetween the six outputs of the power distribution box on the top of the WRBR and the intra-cabinet components.

Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 show the relationship between the six power control switches of thepower distribution box and the components of the WRBR.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 105: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-4 Power supply of the WRBR

Table 3-3 Relationship between the power control switches and the components

Component Power Control Switch

WRBS (upper) SW1, SW4

WRBS (middle) SW2, SW5

WRBS (lower) SW3, SW6

3.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the WRBRCabinet

The connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68-22 cabinet are different fromthose in the N68-22-N cabinet.

Figure 3-5 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR.

NOTE

The grounding bolts on the cabinet base are used to fix the PGND cables of the cabinet doors. The numberof the grounding bolts for the N68-22 cabinet is different from that for the N68-22-N cabinet. The followingtakes the N68-22-N cabinet as an example. For the installation of the PGND cables, refer to InstallingPGND Cables to RNC Cabinet Doors.

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-7

Page 106: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the WRBR

Table 3-4 describes the power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 107: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 3-4 Power cables and PGND cables inside the WRBR

Number Cable Name

1.1–6.2 Power cables of the WRBS

8, 9 PGND cables of the cabinet busbar

10–12 PGND cables of the subrack

13–15 PGND cables connecting the busbars ofdifferent cabinets

16, 17, 39, 40 PGND cables of the cabinet side doors

20 PGND cable connecting the powerdistribution box and the busbar

18, 19, 41, 42 PGND cables of the cabinet front and backdoors

3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR CabinetThis describes connections of signal cables in the WRBR cabinet. The signal cables in the WRBRinclude the following: the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box, the opticalcables connecting the WMUXb in the WRBR to the WLPU in the WRSR, the optical cablesconnecting the WOSEc in the WRBS to another device, the trunk cables connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to another device, and the Ethernet cables connecting theWFEEs/WFIEs in the WRBR to the LAN switches in the WRSR.

Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7 show the connections of the WRBR signal cables.

NOTE

l The types of the interface boards in the WRBS are presented as an example. The actual board typedepends on the site plan.

l The quantity of the trunk cables is presented as an example. The actual quantity depends on the siteplan.

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-9

Page 108: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-6 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (1)

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 109: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 3-7 Connections of the WRBR signal cables (2)

Table 3-5 describes the signal cables in the WRBR.

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-11

Page 110: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 3-5 Signal cables in the WRBR

Number Cable Name ConnectorType 1/ConnectionPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

7 Monitoringsignal cable ofthe powerdistribution box

DB15/PortCOM4 on theback panel of thepowerdistribution box

DB15/PortMONITOR onthe back of thelowest WRBS

21–26 Optical cablesconnecting theWMUXb in theWRBR to theWLPU in theWRSR

SC/PC/Opticalports TX andRX on theWMUXb

LC/PC/Opticalport on theWLPU

The actualinstallationpositions of theoptical cablesdepend on thesite plan. Theoptical cableruns through theoptical cabletray to the backof the cabinet.The surplus partof the opticalcable needs tobe coiled up inthe optical cablebox at the backof the cabinet.The informationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 111: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number Cable Name ConnectorType 1/ConnectionPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

27–28 Optical cablesconnecting theWOSEc in theWRBS toanother device

LC/PC/Opticalport on theWOSEc

–/Anotherdevice

The opticalcable runsthrough theoptical cabletray to the backof the cabinet.The surplus partof the opticalcable needs tobe coiled up inthe optical cablebox at the backof the cabinet.Connector type2 depends on thetype of theconnecteddevice. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

29–30 Trunk cablesconnecting theWBIEb/WOSEc /WEIE/WFEE in theWRBS toanother device

DB50/Electricalport on theWBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in theWRBS

–/Anotherdevice

The actualquantity of thetrunk cablesdepends on thesite plan.Connector type2 depends on thetype of theconnecteddevice. Theinformationhere is anexample basedon overheadcabling.

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-13

Page 112: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Number Cable Name ConnectorType 1/ConnectionPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ConnectionPosition 2

Remarks

31–38 Ethernet cablesconnecting theWFEEs/WFIEsin the WRBR tothe LANswitches in theWRSR

RJ45/FE port onthe WFEE/WFIE

RJ45/Correspondingport on the LANswitch

The ports on theWFEEs/WFIEsare presented asexamples. Theactualinstallationpositions of theEthernet cablesdepend on thesite plan. TheWFEEs/WFIEscan also connectto anotherdevice directlyand the actualinstallationpositionsdepend on thesite plan. If theWFEEs/WFIEsconnect toanother devicethrough theLAN switches,connect theWFEEs/WFIEsto the LANswitches asdescribed in2.11.3Connections ofSignal Cablesin the WRSRCabinet.

3.4 Engineering Specifications for the WRBR CabinetThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRBR cabinet. The engineeringspecifications for the N68-22 and N68-22-N WRBR include structural specifications andelectrical specifications.

Table 3-6 describes the structural specifications of the N68-22 WRBR and the N68-22-NWRBR.

NOTE

The empty cabinet refers to a rack installed with only front, back and side doors.

3 WRBR CabinetRNC

Hardware Description

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 113: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 3-6 Structural specifications of the WRBR

Item Specification

Dimension 2200 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) x 800 mm (D)

Usable space height N68-22:46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)N68-22-N:45 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Weight N68-22:Rack ≤ 75 kg; Empty cabinet ≤ 130 kg; Fully-configured cabinet≤ 350 kgN68-22-N:Rack: ≤ 105 kg; empty cabinet ≤ 170 kg; fully-configured cabinet≤ 350 kg

Floor bearing weight ≥450 kg/m2

Table 3-7 describes the electrical specifications of the N68-22 WRBR and the N68-22-NWRBR.

Table 3-7 Electrical specifications of the WRBR

Item Specification

Power supply Rated input voltage: -48 V DC; Input voltage range: -40 V DC to-57 V DC

Electromagneticcompatibility

Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.3.1 (2001-09).

Power consumption infull configuration

≤ 2400 W

Heat dissipation ≤1920W

RNCHardware Description 3 WRBR Cabinet

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-15

Page 114: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 115: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

4 WRSS Subrack

About This Chapter

This describes the WRSS subrack. The WRSS is configured in the WRSR. The RNC must beconfigured with one and only one WRSS. The WRSS exchanges data, processes PS services,and provides timing signals for the system.

4.1 Components of the WRSS SubrackThis describes components of the WRSS subrack. The WRSS consists of the fan drawer, theboards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets.

4.2 Fan DrawerThis describes the fan drawer. The fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. Each subrackmust be configured with one fan drawer.

4.3 Boards in the WRSS SubrackThis describes boards in the WRSS subrack. There are 15 slots in the WRSS. Among the slots,slot 7 and slot 8 are 1.5 times the other slots in width. The WRSS subrack can house the followingtypes of board: the WMPU, WLPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc.

4.4 Inter-Subrack ConnectionThis describes the inter-subrack connection. The RNC subracks are of two types: the WRSSsubrack and the WRBS subrack. Usually, one WRSS subrack is configured. One to sixteenWRBS subracks are configured according to the service requirements. The WRSS subrackconnects each WRBS subrack in a star topology, and thus transmits data between the WRSSsubrack and the WRBS subracks and provides clock.

4.5 Transverse Cable TroughThis describes the transverse cable trough. It is used to lead the cables from the front of thesubrack to both sides of the cabinet.

4.6 Air InletsThis describes air inlets. The air inlet provides the air intake path for heat dissipation of thecabinet.

4.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS Subrack

RNCHardware Description 4 WRSS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-1

Page 116: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes the engineering specifications for the WRSS subrack. The engineeringspecifications for the WRSS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and powerconsumption in full configuration.

4 WRSS SubrackRNC

Hardware Description

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 117: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

4.1 Components of the WRSS SubrackThis describes components of the WRSS subrack. The WRSS consists of the fan drawer, theboards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets.

The RNC uses the 14 U shielding subrack of Huawei. Figure 4-1 shows the structure of thesubrack.

Figure 4-1 Structure of the subrack

(1) Fan drawer (2) Hanger

(3) Guide rail (4) Transverse cable trough

(5) Air inlet (6) Handle

(7) Board (8) Huawei logo

(9) Product label

Table 4-1 describes the components of the WRSS.

Table 4-1 Components of the WRSS

Component Description

Fan drawer Refer to 4.2 Fan Drawer.

Boards in the WRSS Refer to 4.3 Boards in the WRSS Subrack.

Horizontal cable trough Refer to 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough.

RNCHardware Description 4 WRSS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-3

Page 118: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Component Description

Air inlets Refer to 4.6 Air Inlets.

4.2 Fan DrawerThis describes the fan drawer. The fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. Each subrackmust be configured with one fan drawer.

CAUTIONThe fan drawer is the main part for heat dissipation. If you need to pull it out when the systemis running, the interruption duration must not exceed one minute. Otherwise, the boards may bedamaged due to overtemperature.

Appearance of Fan drawer

Figure 4-2 shows the fan drawer.

Figure 4-2 Fan drawer

(1) Internal signal cable (2) WCDMA RNC Fan Status Monitoring Unit (WFSM) (3) Handle

(4) Screw (5) LED (6) Fan

LED on the Fan Drawer

The LED on the fan drawer has two colors, as described in Table 4-2.

4 WRSS SubrackRNC

Hardware Description

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 119: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 4-2 LED on the fan drawer

Color

Status Meaning

Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The fan drawer works properly.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The fan drawer is not registered. That is,l In the WRSS, the communication between the fan drawer

and the WMPU is not established.l In the WRBS, the communication between the fan drawer

and the WMUXb is not established.

Red ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The fan drawer is faulty.

For details about setting the address of the fan drawer, refer to 6.7 WFSM Board.

4.3 Boards in the WRSS SubrackThis describes boards in the WRSS subrack. There are 15 slots in the WRSS. Among the slots,slot 7 and slot 8 are 1.5 times the other slots in width. The WRSS subrack can house the followingtypes of board: the WMPU, WLPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc.

Figure 4-3 shows the WRSS in full configuration.

Figure 4-3 WRSS in full configuration

CAUTIONEnsure that each board is in the proper position. Do not insert a WRBS board into the WRSS,or a WRSS board into the WRBS. Otherwise, the board may be damaged.

RNCHardware Description 4 WRSS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-5

Page 120: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

For details of the boards in the WRSS, refer to 6 RNC Boards.

4.4 Inter-Subrack ConnectionThis describes the inter-subrack connection. The RNC subracks are of two types: the WRSSsubrack and the WRBS subrack. Usually, one WRSS subrack is configured. One to sixteenWRBS subracks are configured according to the service requirements. The WRSS subrackconnects each WRBS subrack in a star topology, and thus transmits data between the WRSSsubrack and the WRBS subracks and provides clock.

A pair of 2LC/PC-2SC/PC optical cables are used to connect the WRSS subrack and each WRBSsubrack. The LC/PC connector of the optical cable connects to the active/standby port on theactive/standby WLPU board in the WRSS subrack while the other SC/PC connector of the opticalcable connects to the RX/TX port on the active/standby WMUX/WMUXb board in a WRBSsubrack. The 1+1 backup system is supported in this topology.

The connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Connections between the WRSS subrack and each WRBS subrack

4 WRSS SubrackRNC

Hardware Description

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 121: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

4.5 Transverse Cable TroughThis describes the transverse cable trough. It is used to lead the cables from the front of thesubrack to both sides of the cabinet.

4.6 Air InletsThis describes air inlets. The air inlet provides the air intake path for heat dissipation of thecabinet.

4.7 Engineering Specifications for the WRSS SubrackThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRSS subrack. The engineeringspecifications for the WRSS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and powerconsumption in full configuration.

Table 4-3 describes the engineering specifications of the WRSS.

Table 4-3 Engineering specifications of the WRSS

Item Specification

Dimension 620 mm (H) x 436 mm (W) x 420 mm (D)

Usable space height 14 U

Weight 26 kg for the empty WRSS; no greater than 48kg for the WRSS with boards

Power consumption in full configuration ≤ 1280 W

RNCHardware Description 4 WRSS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-7

Page 122: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 123: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

5 WRBS Subrack

About This Chapter

This describes the WRBS subrack. The WRBS subrack is installed in the WRSR and the WRBR.It is optional. The RNC should be configured with at least one WRBS. The quantity of WRBSsconfigured for the RNC varies from 1 to 16 according to the system capacity required for theengineering. The main functions of the WRBS are performing protocol processing on the controlplane, performing AAL2 switching and termination of the service data on the user plane, andperforming related protocol processing on the user plane. The WRBS provides E1/T1transmission ports and channelized STM-1 ATM transmission ports for the Iu, Iu-BC, Iur, andIub interfaces. It also provides E1/T1 IP transmission ports and FE IP transmission ports for theIu, Iur interface.

5.1 Components of the WRBS SubrackThis describes components of the WRBS subrack. The WRBS consists of the fan drawer, theboards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets.

5.2 Boards in the WRBS SubrackThe WRBS subrack has 16 slots that hold the following types of boards: ATM interface boards(including the WBIE/WBIEb and WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc), IP interface boards (including theWEIE, WFEE, and WFIE), WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, and WSPUb.

5.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS SubrackThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS subrack. The engineeringspecifications for the WRBS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and powerconsumption in full configuration.

RNCHardware Description 5 WRBS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

5-1

Page 124: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

5.1 Components of the WRBS SubrackThis describes components of the WRBS subrack. The WRBS consists of the fan drawer, theboards, the horizontal cable trough, and the air inlets.

The RNC uses the 14 U shielding subrack of Huawei. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of thesubrack.

Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack

(1) Fan drawer (2) Hanger

(3) Guide rail (4) Transverse cable trough

(5) Air inlet (6) Handle

(7) Board (8) Huawei logo

(9) Product label

Table 5-1 describes the components of the WRBS.

Table 5-1 Components of the WRBS

Component Description

Fan drawer Refer to 4.2 Fan Drawer.

Boards in the WRBS Refer to 5.2 Boards in the WRBSSubrack.

5 WRBS SubrackRNC

Hardware Description

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 125: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Component Description

Horizontal cable trough Refer to 4.5 Transverse Cable Trough.

Air inlets Refer to 4.6 Air Inlets.

5.2 Boards in the WRBS SubrackThe WRBS subrack has 16 slots that hold the following types of boards: ATM interface boards(including the WBIE/WBIEb and WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc), IP interface boards (including theWEIE, WFEE, and WFIE), WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb, and WSPUb.

Slots to hold the boards in the WRBS subrack are as follows:

l Slots 0 and 15 hold the WINT (the interface board in the WRBS), WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, and WFEE.

l Slots 7 and 8 hold WMUXs/WMUXbs.

l Slots 10 and 11 hold WSPUbs.

l Slots 2, 4, 5, and 13 hold WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs.

Slots 3, 6, 9 and 12:l They can hold the WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs according to the total board processing

capability of the WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs in the subrack.l In a WRBS subrack, the full configuration for WFMR, WFMRb, and WFMRc is 10, 8 and

4 respectively.

Slots 1 and 14: They can be configured with the WFMR/WFMRb or WFIE based on actualsituations.

l When the Iu/Iur interface uses the IP transmission, each WRBS subrack must be configuredwith two WFIEs in warm backup mode. WFIEs in slots 0 and 15 can be shared by both Iu/Iur and Iub interfaces. You can also configure the boards in slots 1 and 14 independently.

l When slots 1 and 14 are not configured with WFIEs, you can configure the WFMRs/WFMRbs according to the total board processing capability of the WFMR/WFMRb in thesubrack.

Depending on different interfaces in different transmission modes, three typical fullconfigurations of the boards in the WRBS subrack are as follows (Here WFMRc is presentedas an example):

Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based)If the IP transmission mode is not used over Iur/Iu interfaces , slots 0 and 15 are used to holdWINTs for the Iub interface. The full configuration for boards in the WRBS subrack is shownin Figure 5-2.

RNCHardware Description 5 WRBS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

5-3

Page 126: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 5-2 Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, ATM based)

Full Configuration (WFIEs Shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface)If the IP over Ethernet transmission mode is used over the Iub/Iur/Iu interface, WFIEs held inslots 0 and 15 can be shared with the Iub/Iur/Iu interface. The full configuration for boards inthe WRBS subrack is shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Full Configuration (WFIEs shared by the Iub/Iur/Iu Interface)

Full Configuration (Iur/Iu Interface, IP Based, WFIEs in Slots 1 and 14 Used)If IP transmission mode is used over the Iur/Iu interface and slots 0 and 15 are not configuredwith WFIEs, you need to especially configure the WFIE interface boards for the Iu/Iur interfacein slots 1 and 14. The full configuration for boards in the WRBS subrack is shown in Figure5-4.

5 WRBS SubrackRNC

Hardware Description

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 127: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 5-4 Full configuration (Iur/Iu interface, IP based, WFIEs in slots 1 and 14 used)

5.3 Engineering Specifications for the WRBS SubrackThis describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS subrack. The engineeringspecifications for the WRBS include the dimension, usable space height, weight, and powerconsumption in full configuration.

Table 5-2 describes the engineering specifications for the WRBS.

Table 5-2 Engineering specifications of the WRBS

Item Specification

Dimension 620 mm (H) x 436 mm (W) x 420 mm (D)

Usable space height 14 U

Weight 26 kg for the empty WRSS; no greater than 48kg for the WRSS with boards

Power consumption in full configuration ≤ 800 W

RNCHardware Description 5 WRBS Subrack

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

5-5

Page 128: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 129: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6 RNC Boards

About This Chapter

This describes the RNC boards. The RNC boards include the following: WBIE/WBIEb, WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, WFEE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WMUX/WMUXb,WSPUb, WFSM, WOPB, WDMB, WLPU, WMPU, WHPU, and WNET/WNETc.

6.1 RNC Board CompatibilityThis describes the RNC board compatibility. The RNC board compatibility defines whether theRNC boards of different types can be configured in the same subrack at the same time. TheWRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS subrack and the WRSS boards can not beconfigured in WRBS subrack. The WRBS board compatibility the same as WRSS. The RNCboard compatibility is categorized into the WRSS board compatibility and the WRBS boardcompatibility.

6.2 WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the WBIE/WBIEb board. WBIE/WBIEb: WCDMA RNC Interface Board. TheWBIE/WBIEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 inthe WRBS.

6.3 WEIE BoardThis describes the WEIE board. WEIE: WCDMA RNC WRBS packet over 32-port E1/T1interface board. The WEIE is an Iub interface board. The WEIE boards are configured in slots0 and 15 in the WRBS.

6.4 WFEE BoardThis describes the WFEE board. WFEE: WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE and 16-port E1/T1mixed interface board. The WFEE is an Iub interface board. The WFEE boards are configuredin slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

6.5 WFIE BoardThis describes the WFIE board. The WFIE is shortened from WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FEinterface board. The WFIE is configured in slots 0 and 15 in subrack WRBS as the Iub/Iur/Iuinterface board. The WFIE can also be configured in slots 1 and 14 as the Iur/Iu interface board.

6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardWFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc:(WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board): WFMR, that is,the WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board, has two types: WFMRb and WFMRc. Theformer type is the enhanced type I, and the latter one is the enhanced type II. The WFMRs/

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-1

Page 130: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

WFMRbs/WFMRcs are configured in the WRBS subrack. A maximum of ten WFMRs can beconfigured in one WRBS subrack. And the WFMRs are inserted in slot 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13,and 14 in turn; A maximum of eight WFMRbs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. TheWFMRbs are inserted in slot 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 and 13 in turn; A maximum of four WFMRcscan be configured in one WRBS subrack. The WFMRcs are inserted in slot 2, 4, 5, and 13 inturn.

6.7 WFSM BoardThis describes the WFSM board. WFSM is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Fan StatusMonitoring Unit. It is installed at the rear of the fan drawer.

6.8 WHPU BoardThis describes the WHPU board. The WHPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC High speedPacket processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The N:1 (N < 5) resource pool mode isadopted, and thus the WRSS can hold up to five WHPUs in slots 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 accordingto the actual traffic volume.

6.9 WLPU BoardThis describes the WLPU board. The WLPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC LineProcessing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS can hold up to six WLPUs in slots2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9 according to the actual traffic volume. The WLPU is an Iu/Iur/Iub interfaceboard and is used to connect the WRBS with the WRSS.

6.10 WMPU BoardThis describes the WMPU board. The WMPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC switchmodule Main Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS holds two WMPUsin slots 0 and 1. The two boards work in the active/standby mode.

6.11 WMUX/WMUXb BoardThis describes the WMUX and WMUXb boards. The WMUX is shortened from the WCDMARNC system MUltipleXing board, and the WMUXb is the enhanced version of the WMUX.The WMUX/WMUXb is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WMUX/WMUXbsin slots 7 and 8. The two boards work in active/standby mode.

6.12 WNET/WNETc BoardThis describes the WNET and WNETc boards. The WNET is shortened from the WCDMARNC NETwork switch board, and the WNETc is the enhanced version of the WNET. TheWNET/WNETc is configured in the WRSS. Each WRSS holds two WNET/WNETc boards inslots 7 and 8. The WNET/WNETc is composed of a main board and a clock sub-board. Themain board works in dual-plane mode, and the clock sub-board works in active/standby mode.

6.13 WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the WOSE/WOSEb board. WOSE: RNC Single mode Optical interface board ofE1. WOSEb is the enhanced version of WOSE. The WOSE/WOSEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interfaceboard. The WOSE/WOSEb boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

6.14 WOSEc BoardThis describes the WOSEc board. The WOSEc is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Singlemode Optical interface board of E1/T1 (enhanced II). It is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. TheWOSEc boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

6.15 WSPUb BoardThis describes the WSPUb board. The WSPUb is shortened from the WCDMA RNC SignalingProcessing board (enhanced). It is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WSPUbsin slots 10 and 11. The two boards work in the active/standby mode.

6.16 WDMB Board

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 131: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes the WDMB board. The WDMB is shortened from the Power Distribution MonitorBoard. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each powerdistribution box holds one WDMB.

6.17 WOPB BoardThis describes the WOPB board. The WOPB is shortened from the WCDMA RNC OvervoltageProtection Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet.Each power distribution box holds one WOPB.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-3

Page 132: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.1 RNC Board CompatibilityThis describes the RNC board compatibility. The RNC board compatibility defines whether theRNC boards of different types can be configured in the same subrack at the same time. TheWRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS subrack and the WRSS boards can not beconfigured in WRBS subrack. The WRBS board compatibility the same as WRSS. The RNCboard compatibility is categorized into the WRSS board compatibility and the WRBS boardcompatibility.

WRSS Board Compatibility

All types of WRSS boards can be configured in the WRSS at the same time.

WRBS Board CompatibilityThe WRBS boards are of the following two types:

l Interface boards: WBIE, WBIEb, WOSE, WOSEb, WOSEc, WEIE, WFIE, and WFEE

l Other boards: WMUX, WMUXb, WFMR, WFMRb, WFMRc, and WSPUb

The WRBS board compatibility mainly discusses the compatibility between the interface boards.The other boards are completely compatible with each other and with all the interface boards.

Table 6-1 describes the compatibility between the WRBS interface boards.

Table 6-1 Compatibility between WRBS interface boards

WBIE WBIEb WOSE

WOSEb

WOSEc WFIE WFEE

WEIE

WBIE Y Y N N N Y Y Y

WBIEb Y Y N N N Y Y Y

WOSE N N Y Y N Y Y Y

WOSEb N N Y Y N Y Y Y

WOSEc N N N N Y Y Y Y

WFIE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

WFEE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

WEIE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

NOTE

In the above table, Y means the two boards can be configured in the same WRBS at the same time, and N meansthe two boards cannot be configured in the same WRBS at the same time.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 133: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.2 WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the WBIE/WBIEb board. WBIE/WBIEb: WCDMA RNC Interface Board. TheWBIE/WBIEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. The boards are configured in slots 0 and 15 inthe WRBS.

The WBIE/WBIEb performs the following functions:

l Providing 32 E1s/T1s

l Supporting 32-E1/T1 IMA function, and also supporting UNI mode

l Supporting ATM over Fractional E1/T1, and Fractional IMA

l Supporting timeslot cross-connection

l Providing AAL2 switching function

l Providing intra-board ATM switching function

l Providing clock resource for the NodeB

l Extracting timing signals from the upper-layer devices and exporting them to the clockmodule through the clock ports which in front panel of the board.

l The WBIE supports 24 Mbit/s data streams.

l The WBIEb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

NOTE

Do not configure the WBIE/WBIEb and the WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc in one WRBS.

6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board. The components on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board refer to the LEDs and ports.

6.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb.

6.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes ports on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the CLK1 andCLK2 ports for exporting timing signals and four E1/T1 ports.

6.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides thefollowing DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12.

6.2.1 Panel of the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board. The components on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb board refer to the LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-1 shows the WBIE/WBIEb panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-5

Page 134: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-1 WBIE/WBIEb panel

6.2.2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb.

Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 135: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WBIE/WBIEb, this LED isalways on because the WBIE/WBIEbdoes not work in active/standbymode.

OFF None

6.2.3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes ports on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides the CLK1 andCLK2 ports for exporting timing signals and four E1/T1 ports.

Table 6-3 describes the ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.

Table 6-3 Ports on the WBIE/WBIEb panel

Name Function Type

E1/T1 The first group (from the top down) is used to transmitand receive E1/T1 signals of channels 24–31.

DB50

E1/T1 The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signals of channels 16–23.

DB50

E1/T1 The third group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals of channels 8–15.

DB50

E1/T1 The fourth group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals of channels 0–7.

DB50

CLK1 This port is used to export timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB,male

CLK2 This port is used to export timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB,male

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-7

Page 136: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.2.4 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides thefollowing DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12.

Figure 6-2 shows the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.

Figure 6-2 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb

Table 6-4 describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.

Table 6-4 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwistedPair Cable

S17 1 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF

3 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 16–23

ON OFF

4 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 24–31

ON OFF

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 137: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwistedPair Cable

5–8 Reserved ON OFF

S16 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S15 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S5 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 8–11

ON OFF

S6 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 12–15

ON OFF

S10 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 16–19

ON OFF

S11 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 20–23

ON OFF

S13 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 24–27

ON OFF

S14 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 28–31

ON OFF

S7 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 ON OFF

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 8–15 ON OFF

S9 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16–23

ON OFF

S12 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 24–31

ON OFF

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the unbalanced mode. In this case,the TX end is grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to ON. When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the balanced mode. In this case, the TXend is not grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to OFF.

l Whether in balanced or unbalanced mode, the RX end is not grounded.

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 6-4.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 6-4.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-9

Page 138: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.3 WEIE BoardThis describes the WEIE board. WEIE: WCDMA RNC WRBS packet over 32-port E1/T1interface board. The WEIE is an Iub interface board. The WEIE boards are configured in slots0 and 15 in the WRBS.

The WEIE performs the following functions:

l Providing IP transmission for the Iub interface

l Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells

l Providing 32 E1s/T1s for the IP over PPP over E1/T1

l Providing clock resource for the NodeB

l The WEIE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

6.3.1 Panel of the WEIE BoardThis describes the panel of the WEIE board. The components on the panel of the WEIE refer tothe LEDs and ports.

6.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WEIE.

6.3.3 Ports on the WEIE BoardThis describes ports on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports, andfour E1/T1 ports.

6.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

6.3.1 Panel of the WEIE BoardThis describes the panel of the WEIE board. The components on the panel of the WEIE refer tothe LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-3 shows the WEIE panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 139: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-3 WEIE panel

6.3.2 LEDs on the WEIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WEIE.

Table 6-5 describes the LEDs on the WEIE panel.

Table 6-5 LEDs on the WEIE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-11

Page 140: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WEIE, this LED is alwayson because the WEIE does notwork in active/standby mode.

OFF None

6.3.3 Ports on the WEIE BoardThis describes ports on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the CLK1 and CLK2 ports, andfour E1/T1 ports.

Table 6-6 describes the ports on the WEIE panel.

Table 6-6 Ports on the WEIE panel

Name Function Type

E1/T1 The first group (from the top down) is used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals of channels 24–31.

DB50

E1/T1 The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signalsof channels 16–23.

DB50

E1/T1 The third group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signalsof channels 8–15.

DB50

E1/T1 The fourth group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signalsof channels 0–7.

DB50

CLK1 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

CLK2 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

6.3.4 DIP Switches on the WEIE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Figure 6-4 shows the DIP switches on the WEIE.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 141: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-4 DIP switches on the WEIE

NOTE

With two identical sub-boards, the WEIE has two groups of DIP switches of the same type, for example,two S1s, as shown in Figure 6-4.

Table 6-7 describes the DIP switches on the WEIE.

Table 6-7 DIP switches on the WEIE

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 1–8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0–7(16–23)

ON OFF OFF

S2 1–8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8–15(24–31)

ON OFF OFF

S3 1 Indication ofimpedance

ON OFF ON

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-13

Page 142: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

2 selection switchof E1s/T1s 0–15(16–31)

ON ON OFF

S4 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7(16–23)

ON OFF OFF

S5 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 8–15(24–31)

ON OFF OFF

NOTE

l The DIP switches on the lower sub-board control links 0–15 and the DIP switches on the upper sub-board control links 16–31. For example, in Figure 6-4, the S4 on the lower sub-board is the TXground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7, and the S4 on the upper sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16–23.

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1transport is used.

l Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

l Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

l Table 6-7 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.

6.4 WFEE BoardThis describes the WFEE board. WFEE: WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FE and 16-port E1/T1mixed interface board. The WFEE is an Iub interface board. The WFEE boards are configuredin slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

The WFEE performs the following functions:

l Providing IP transmission for the Iub interface

l Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells

l Providing 16 E1s/T1s for the IP over PPP over E1/T1

l Providing timing signals for the NodeB through E1/T1 ports

l The WFEE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

6.4.1 Panel of the WFEE BoardThis describes the panel of the WFEE board. The components on the panel of the WFEE referto the LEDs and ports.

6.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE Board

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 143: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFEE.

6.4.3 Ports on the WFEE BoardThis describes ports on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1,FE2, FE3, two groups of E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2.

6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

6.4.1 Panel of the WFEE BoardThis describes the panel of the WFEE board. The components on the panel of the WFEE referto the LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-5 shows the WFEE panel.

Figure 6-5 WFEE panel

6.4.2 LEDs on the WFEE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFEE.

Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the WFEE panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-15

Page 144: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-8 LEDs on the WFEE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WFEE, this LED is always onbecause the WFEE does not work inactive/standby mode.

OFF None

6.4.3 Ports on the WFEE BoardThis describes ports on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1,FE2, FE3, two groups of E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2.

Table 6-9 describes the ports on the WFEE panel.

Table 6-9 Ports on the WFEE panel

Name Function Type

FE 0 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 0. RJ45

FE 1 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 1. RJ45

FE 2 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 2. RJ45

FE 3 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 3. RJ45

E1/T1 The first group (from the top down) is used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals of channels 8–15.

DB50

E1/T1 The second group is used to transmit and receive E1/T1 signalsof channels 0–7.

DB50

CLK1 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

CLK2 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 145: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.4.4 DIP Switches on the WFEE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Figure 6-6 shows the DIP switches on the WFEE.

Figure 6-6 DIP switches on the WFEE

Table 6-10 describes the DIP switches on the WFEE.

Table 6-10 DIP switches on the WFEE

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 1–8 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF OFF

S2 1–8 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF OFF

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-17

Page 146: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S3 1 Indication ofimpedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–15

ON OFF ON

2 ON ON OFF

S4 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF OFF

S5 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF OFF

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1transport is used.

l Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

l Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

l Table 6-10 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.

6.5 WFIE BoardThis describes the WFIE board. The WFIE is shortened from WCDMA RNC WRBS 4-port FEinterface board. The WFIE is configured in slots 0 and 15 in subrack WRBS as the Iub/Iur/Iuinterface board. The WFIE can also be configured in slots 1 and 14 as the Iur/Iu interface board.

The WFIE performs the following functions:

l Providing IP transmission for the Iub/Iur/Iu interface

l Implementing the conversion between IP packets and AAL2 cells

l Supporting the MBMS function of the IuPS interface based on IP transmission

l The WFIE supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE BoardThis describes the panel of the WFIE board. The components on the panel of the WFIE refer tothe LEDs and ports.

6.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFIE.

6.5.3 Ports on the WFIE BoardThis describes ports on the WFIE board. The WFIE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1,FE2, FE3, CLK1, and CLK2.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 147: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.5.1 Panel of the WFIE BoardThis describes the panel of the WFIE board. The components on the panel of the WFIE refer tothe LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-7 shows the WFIE panel.

Figure 6-7 WFIE panel

6.5.2 LEDs on the WFIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFIE.

Table 6-11 describes the LEDs on the WFIE panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-19

Page 148: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-11 LEDs on the WFIE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFF for0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

6.5.3 Ports on the WFIE BoardThis describes ports on the WFIE board. The WFIE provides the following ports: FE0, FE1,FE2, FE3, CLK1, and CLK2.

Table 6-12 describes the ports on the WFIE panel.

Table 6-12 Ports on the WFIE panel

Name Function Type

FE 0 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 0. RJ45

FE 1 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 1. RJ45

FE 2 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 2. RJ45

FE 3 The FE port is used to transmit and receive signals of FE 3. RJ45

CLK1 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

CLK2 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

6.6 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardWFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc:(WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board): WFMR, that is,the WCDMA RNC Radio Frame Processing board, has two types: WFMRb and WFMRc. Theformer type is the enhanced type I, and the latter one is the enhanced type II. The WFMRs/WFMRbs/WFMRcs are configured in the WRBS subrack. A maximum of ten WFMRs can beconfigured in one WRBS subrack. And the WFMRs are inserted in slot 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13,and 14 in turn; A maximum of eight WFMRbs can be configured in one WRBS subrack. The

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 149: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

WFMRbs are inserted in slot 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12 and 13 in turn; A maximum of four WFMRcscan be configured in one WRBS subrack. The WFMRcs are inserted in slot 2, 4, 5, and 13 inturn.

The WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc performs the following functions:

l Multiplexing and demultiplexing

NOTE

The WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc receives data from the NodeBs, demultiplexes the data, and thensends it to the corresponding processing units. It also receives signaling, speech, and packet data inthe forward direction, multiplexes it, and then sends it to the NodeB.

l Processing frame protocols

l Selecting and distributing cells

l Performing Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) of the Radio Link Control (RLC)

l Processing internal communication protocols between the WSPUb and the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc

l Implementing encryption and decryption

l Supporting HSUPA

l The WFMR supports 4 Mbit/s data streams and 16 cells.

l The WFMRb supports 8 Mbit/s data streams and 39 cells.

l The WFMRc supports 30 Mbit/s data streams and 90 cells.

6.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are only three LEDs onthe panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. The three LEDs are RUN, ALM, and ACT.

6.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN,ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc.

6.6.1 Panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are only three LEDs onthe panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc. The three LEDs are RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Figure 6-8 shows the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-21

Page 150: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-8 WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel

6.6.2 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN,ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc.

Table 6-13 describes the LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel.

Table 6-13 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 151: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, thisLED is always on because the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc does not work inactive/standby mode.

OFF None

6.7 WFSM BoardThis describes the WFSM board. WFSM is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Fan StatusMonitoring Unit. It is installed at the rear of the fan drawer.

The WFSM performs the following functions:

l Monitoring the status of each fan in the fan drawer and displaying the operational state byLEDs

l Communicating with the WMUXb in the WRBS or the WMPU in the WRSS and reportingthe operational state of the fan drawer

l Collecting temperature information using temperature sensors to adjust fan speeds

l Sending Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals to adjust fan speeds

6.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM BoardThis describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board.

6.7.1 DIP Switch on the WFSM BoardThis describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board.

Figure 6-9 shows the DIP switch on the WFSM.

Figure 6-9 DIP switch on the WFSM

The DIP switch S1 has four bits. It is used to set the address of the WFSM.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-23

Page 152: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

To set the address, pull out the fan drawer as described in the RNC Site Maintenance Guide.Then, set S1 as listed in Table 6-14.

Table 6-14 DIP switch on the WFSM

DIP Switch Bit Status Meaning

S1 1, the least significant bit ON 0

2 OFF 1

3 ON 0

4, the most significant bit ON 0

CAUTIONIn the RNC, the DIP switch on the WFSM must be set as listed in Table 6-14.

6.8 WHPU BoardThis describes the WHPU board. The WHPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC High speedPacket processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The N:1 (N < 5) resource pool mode isadopted, and thus the WRSS can hold up to five WHPUs in slots 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 accordingto the actual traffic volume.

The WHPU performs the following functions:

l Managing GTP-U tunnel resource, establishing and releasing tunnel connections

l Forwarding GTP-U messages

l Managing GTP-U paths

l Supporting Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS)

l The WHPU supports 240 Mbit/s data streams.

6.8.1 Panel of the WHPU BoardThis describes the panel of the WHPU board. There are only LEDs on the panel of the WHPU.

6.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel ofthe WHPU.

6.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU BoardThis describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board.

6.8.1 Panel of the WHPU BoardThis describes the panel of the WHPU board. There are only LEDs on the panel of the WHPU.

Figure 6-10 shows the WHPU panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 153: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-10 WHPU panel

6.8.2 LEDs on the WHPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel ofthe WHPU.

Table 6-15 describes the LEDs on the WHPU panel.

Table 6-15 LEDs on the WHPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 sand OFF for1 s

The board is active and functional.

ON for 2 sand OFF for2 s

The board is standby and functional.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-25

Page 154: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON for 1 sand OFF for5 s

The board is idle. This may occur only when thenumber of the active WHPUs that is configuredon the LMT is smaller than the actual numberminus 1.

ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON orflashing

There is a fault alarm.

6.8.3 DIP Switch on the WHPU BoardThis describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board.

Figure 6-11 shows the DIP switch on the WHPU.

Figure 6-11 DIP switch on the WHPU

Table 6-16 describes the DIP switch on the WHPU.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 155: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-16 DIP switch on the WHPU

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Meaning Description

S2 1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational statusselection bit

OFF The board is indebugging mode.

2 ON (default) The board is in thenormal mode.

Operation mode selectionbit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selectionbit

In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog functionis enabled.

Watchdog functionselection bit

OFF The watchdog functionis disabled.

6.9 WLPU BoardThis describes the WLPU board. The WLPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC LineProcessing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS can hold up to six WLPUs in slots2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 9 according to the actual traffic volume. The WLPU is an Iu/Iur/Iub interfaceboard and is used to connect the WRBS with the WRSS.

The WLPU is composed of a main board and an optical sub-board. The WLPU performs thefollowing functions:

l Providing 16 STM-1/OC-3c optical ports under full configuration, that is, when fourW4ASb/W4ASc optical sub-boards are configured. Alternatively, providing four STM-4optical ports under full configuration, that is, when four W1TSb optical sub-boards areconfigured.

l Supporting ATM over SDH, and supporting MSP 1+1 optical port backup

l Monitoring the quality of synchronization clock in real time, and reporting it to the WMPU

6.9.1 Panels of the WLPU BoardThis describes panels of the WLPU board. The following components are on the panel of theWLPU: the LEDs and ports.

6.9.2 LED on the WLPU BoardThis describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board.

6.9.3 Ports on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU supports multiple types of sub-board configurations, providing three transmissionmodes of optical interfaces: STM-1 (SDH), STM-4 (SDH), and OC-3c (SONET).

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-27

Page 156: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch.

6.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU BoardsThe WLPU board supports three types of optical sub-board: W4ASb, W4ASc, and W1TSb. Thespecifications for the optical ports cover optical cable mode, connector type, transport mode,transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and centerwavelength.

6.9.1 Panels of the WLPU BoardThis describes panels of the WLPU board. The following components are on the panel of theWLPU: the LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-12 shows the WLPU panels.

Figure 6-12 WLPU panels

(1) WLPU panel when four W4ASb/W4ASc opticalsub-boards are configured

(2) WLPU panel when four W1TSb optical sub-boardsare configured

6.9.2 LED on the WLPU BoardThis describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board.

Table 6-17 describes the LED on the WLPU panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 157: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-17 LED on the WLPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

6.9.3 Ports on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU supports multiple types of sub-board configurations, providing three transmissionmodes of optical interfaces: STM-1 (SDH), STM-4 (SDH), and OC-3c (SONET).

Table 6-18 describes the ports on the WLPU panel.

Table 6-18 Ports on the WLPU panel

Optical Sub-Board

Transmission Mode

Rate Mode

Logical PortNumber

Type

W4ASb STM-1 (SDH) 155 Mbit/s Singlemode

0-15, from the topdown

LC/PC

W4ASc STM-1(SDH)/OC-3c(SONET)

155 Mbit/s Singlemode

0-15, from the topdown

LC/PC

W1TSb STM-4 (SDH) 622 Mbit/s Singlemode

0, 4, 8, and 12, fromthe top down

SC/PC

6.9.4 DIP Switch on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch.

Figure 6-13 shows the DIP switch on the WLPU.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-29

Page 158: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the WLPU

Table 6-19 describes the DIP switch on the WLPU.

Table 6-19 DIP switch on the WLPU

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational status selectionbit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation mode selection bit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog function selectionbit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 159: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.9.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WLPU BoardsThe WLPU board supports three types of optical sub-board: W4ASb, W4ASc, and W1TSb. Thespecifications for the optical ports cover optical cable mode, connector type, transport mode,transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and centerwavelength.

Table 6-20 describes the specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards.

Table 6-20 Specifications for optical ports on WLPU boards

Item W4ASb W4ASc W1TSb

Optical cable mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC SC/PC

Transport mode STM-1 STM-1/OC-3c STM-4

Transmissiondistance

< 15 km < 15 km < 15 km

Output optical power –15.0 dBm to –8.0dBm

–15.0 dBm to –8.0dBm

–15.0 dBm to –8.0dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –31.0 dBm ≤ –31.0 dBm ≤ –29.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –8.0 dBm ≤ –8.0 dBm ≤ –7.0 dBm

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

6.10 WMPU BoardThis describes the WMPU board. The WMPU is shortened from the WCDMA RNC switchmodule Main Processing board. It is configured in the WRSS. The WRSS holds two WMPUsin slots 0 and 1. The two boards work in the active/standby mode.

The WMPU performs the following functions:

l Allocating resources in the WRSS

l Managing and monitoring other boards in the WRSS

l Providing operation and maintenance channels between the BAM and the WRBS

6.10.1 Panel of the WMPU BoardThis describes the panel of the WMPU. The following components are on the panel of theWMPU: the LEDs, buttons, and ports.

6.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panelof the WMPU.

6.10.3 Ports on the WMPU BoardThe WMPU provides three ports: ETH, CON, and AUX.

6.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU Board

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-31

Page 160: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

The WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch.

6.10.1 Panel of the WMPU BoardThis describes the panel of the WMPU. The following components are on the panel of theWMPU: the LEDs, buttons, and ports.

Figure 6-14 shows the WMPU panel.

Figure 6-14 WMPU panel

The RESET button is used to reset the board.

NOTE

In addition, you can reset the board by running the RST BRD command.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 161: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONResetting a board interrupts the existing services on the board. Therefore, perform this operationwith caution.

6.10.2 LEDs on the WMPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panelof the WMPU.

Table 6-21 describes the LEDs on the WMPU panel.

Table 6-21 LEDs on the WMPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

6.10.3 Ports on the WMPU BoardThe WMPU provides three ports: ETH, CON, and AUX.

Table 6-22 describes the ports on the WMPU panel.

Table 6-22 Ports on the WMPU panel

Name Function Type

ETH Ethernet port, used for the communication betweenthe WMPU and the BAM server

RJ45

CON Debugging serial port, used to connect the console DB9, male

AUX Remote Modem serial port, used for remotemaintenance

DB9, male

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-33

Page 162: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.10.4 DIP Switch on the WMPU BoardThe WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-15 shows the DIP switch on the WMPU.

Figure 6-15 DIP switch on the WMPU

Table 6-23 describes the DIP switch on the WMPU.

Table 6-23 DIP switch on the WMPU

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational status selectionbit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation mode selection bit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 163: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Bit Status Meaning Description

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog function selectionbit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

6.11 WMUX/WMUXb BoardThis describes the WMUX and WMUXb boards. The WMUX is shortened from the WCDMARNC system MUltipleXing board, and the WMUXb is the enhanced version of the WMUX.The WMUX/WMUXb is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WMUX/WMUXbsin slots 7 and 8. The two boards work in active/standby mode.

The WMUX/WMUXb is composed of a main board and an optical sub-board. The WMUX/WMUXb performs the following functions:

l Performing ATM cell switching

l Providing synchronization clock for the boards in the WRBS

l Managing and monitoring all boards in the WRBS

l Processing alarms concerning the power supply and the fan

l The WMUX supports 40 Mbit/s data streams.

l The WMUXb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

6.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThis describes the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb board. The following components are on thepanel of the WMUX/WMUXb: the LEDs, buttons, and ports.

6.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb.

6.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThe WMUX/WMUXb provides the following ports: TX, RX, ETH, 1PPS, COM1, andCOM2.

6.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards cover optical cable mode,connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, andcenter wavelength.

6.11.1 Panel of the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThis describes the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb board. The following components are on thepanel of the WMUX/WMUXb: the LEDs, buttons, and ports.

Figure 6-16 shows the WMUX/WMUXb panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-35

Page 164: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-16 WMUX/WMUXb panel

The RESET button is used to reset the board.

NOTE

In addition, you can reset the board by running the RST BRD command.

CAUTIONResetting a board interrupts the existing services on the board. Therefore, perform this operationwith caution.

6.11.2 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb.

Table 6-24 describes the LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 165: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-24 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

6.11.3 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThe WMUX/WMUXb provides the following ports: TX, RX, ETH, 1PPS, COM1, andCOM2.

Table 6-25 describes the ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel.

Table 6-25 Ports on the WMUX/WMUXb panel

Name Function Type

TX TX is the transmitting optical port and RX is thereceiving optical port. The two types of ports are used tocommunicate with the WLPU in the WRSS.

Single-mode 155Mbit/s STM-1/OC-3c SC/PCRX

ETH Ethernet port used to test the board. It is disconnectedwhen the board is working.

RJ45

1PPS PPS signal receiving port, used to receive PPS signalsfrom the GRU suite

RJ45

COM1 Communication serial port, used to exchangemanagement and maintenance information between theWMUXb and the GRU suite

RJ45

COM2 Communication serial port, reserved RJ45

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-37

Page 166: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.11.4 Specifications for Optical Ports on WMUX/WMUXb BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards cover optical cable mode,connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, andcenter wavelength.

Table 6-26 describes the specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards.

Table 6-26 Specifications for optical ports on WMUX/WMUXb boards

Item Specification

Optical cable mode Single-mode

Connector type SC/PC

Transmission distance < 30 km

Output optical power –14.0 dBm to –8.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –34.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –6.0 dBm

Center wavelength 1,310 nm

6.12 WNET/WNETc BoardThis describes the WNET and WNETc boards. The WNET is shortened from the WCDMARNC NETwork switch board, and the WNETc is the enhanced version of the WNET. TheWNET/WNETc is configured in the WRSS. Each WRSS holds two WNET/WNETc boards inslots 7 and 8. The WNET/WNETc is composed of a main board and a clock sub-board. Themain board works in dual-plane mode, and the clock sub-board works in active/standby mode.

Accordingly, the WNET/WNETc has two functional parts: switching network part and clockpart.

The functions of the switching network part of the WNET/WNETc are as follows:

l Performing fast switching of fixed-length packets on 40 x 40 ports with a total switchingcapacity of 25 Gbit/s

l Providing 40 ports with the maximum rate on each port being 622 Mbit/s (full duplex)

l Providing system diagnosis, reporting the status of the switching network in real time, andhelping the system detect and trace errors

The functions of the clock part of the WNET/WNETc are as follows:

l Extracting timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from thesynchronization line signals, processing the timing signals, and providing them for theentire system

l Providing two 2 Mbit/s input ports (CLK IN2, CLK IN3)

l Providing two 2 MHz input ports, which share two physical ports with 2 Mbit/s input ports(CLK IN2, CLK IN3)

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 167: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

l Providing one 8 kHz input port, which shares the physical port CLK IN2 with 2 Mbit/sinput port

l Providing two satellite clock synchronization input ports (CLK IN0, CLK IN1), eachincluding the differential 1PPS signal

l Providing line clock extraction and timing signal output

6.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WNET/WNETc: the LEDs and ports.

6.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc.

6.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc BoardThe WNET/WNETc provides the following ports: CLK IN0, CLK IN1, CLK OUT0, CLKOUT1, CLK IN2, and CLK IN3.

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switchS2 on its clock sub-board.

6.12.1 Panel of the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WNET/WNETc: the LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-17 shows the WNET/WNETc panel.

Figure 6-17 WNET/WNETc panel

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-39

Page 168: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.12.2 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc.

Table 6-27 describes the LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.

Table 6-27 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

CLK Green ON for 0.25 s and OFFfor 0.25 s

The clock is in fast pull-in status.

ON for 3 s and OFF for1 s

The clock is in locked status.

ON for 1 s and OFF for3 s

The clock is in hold status.

ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The clock is in free-run status.

ON There is a fault alarm.

OFF

ACT Green ON The clock sub-board on this board isactive.

OFF The clock sub-board on this board isstandby.

6.12.3 Ports on the WNET/WNETc BoardThe WNET/WNETc provides the following ports: CLK IN0, CLK IN1, CLK OUT0, CLKOUT1, CLK IN2, and CLK IN3.

Table 6-28 describes the ports on the WNET/WNETc panel.

Table 6-28 Ports on the WNET/WNETc panel

Name Function Type

CLK IN0 Connected to the GRU suite and used to input timing signals RJ45

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 169: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Function Type

CLK IN1 Optional, connected to the GRU suite and used to inputtiming signals

RJ45

CLK OUT0 This port is not used in the RNC. RJ45

CLK OUT1 This port is not used in the RNC. SMB, male

CLK IN2 Clock input port 2, used to input 2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz and 8 kHztiming signals

SMB, male

CLK IN3 Clock input port 3, used to input 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz timingsignals

SMB, male

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switchS2 on its clock sub-board.

Figure 6-18 shows the DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc.

Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc

Table 6-29 describes the DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-41

Page 170: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-29 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational statusselection bit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation modeselection bit

OFF The board is in the equipmenttest mode.

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is alwaysset to OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog functionselection bit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

6.13 WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the WOSE/WOSEb board. WOSE: RNC Single mode Optical interface board ofE1. WOSEb is the enhanced version of WOSE. The WOSE/WOSEb is an Iub/Iur/Iu interfaceboard. The WOSE/WOSEb boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

WOSE/WOSEb performs the following functions:

l Supporting ATM over E1 over SDH bearer mode, providing 63 E1s

l Providing eight E1 ports that support Fractional ATM and CES functions

l Providing IMA function, supporting IMA/UNI mode, and supporting up to 32 IMA groupsand UNI links in total

l Providing intra-board ATM switching function

l Providing clock resource for the NodeB

l Receiving timing signals from the upper level equipment and sending them to the clockmodule

l The WOSE supports 24 Mbit/s data streams.

l The WOSEb supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

CAUTIONl The WOSE/WOSEb and the WBIE/WBIEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS.

l The WOSE/WOSEb and the WOSEc cannot be configured in the same WRBS.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 171: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

l The optical port on the WOSE/WOSEb does not support the fractional ATM function.

l The electrical port on the WOSE/WOSEb does not support the timeslot cross-connection function.

6.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb board. The following components are locatedon the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb: the LEDs and ports.

6.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb.

6.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the ports on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides thefollowing ports: OPT, E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2.

6.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb providesthe following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9.

6.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WOSE/WOSEb boards cover optical cable mode,connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, andcenter wavelength.

6.13.1 Panel of the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb board. The following components are locatedon the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb: the LEDs and ports.

WOSE PanelFigure 6-19 shows the WOSE panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-43

Page 172: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-19 WOSE panel

WOSEb PanelFigure 6-20 shows the WOSEb panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 173: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-20 WOSEb panel

6.13.2 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb.

Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb panel.

Table 6-30 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-45

Page 174: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ACT Green ON In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that theboard is active. In other modes, itindicates nothing.

OFF In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that theboard is standby. In other modes, itindicates nothing.

6.13.3 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the ports on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb provides thefollowing ports: OPT, E1/T1, CLK1, and CLK2.

Table 6-31 describes the ports on WOSE/WOSEb panel.

Table 6-31 Ports on the WOSE/WOSEb panel

Name Function Type

OPT Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals

Single-mode 155Mbit/s MTRJ forthe WOSESingle-mode 155Mbit/s LC/PC forthe WOSEb

E1/T1 E1 port, used to transmit and receive E1 signals DB50

CLK1 This port is used to output timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB, male

CLK2 This port is used to output timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB, male

6.13.4 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb providesthe following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9.

Figure 6-21 shows the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 175: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-21 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb

Table 6-32 describes the settings and meanings of DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.

Table 6-32 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for 120-ohm Twisted PairCable

S3 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S4 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

OFF OFF

S5 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S6 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

OFF OFF

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-47

Page 176: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for 120-ohm Twisted PairCable

S7 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

S8 1–8 RX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

OFF OFF

S9 1 Indication ofimpedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 ON ON

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 6-32.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 6-32.

6.13.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSE/WOSEb BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WOSE/WOSEb boards cover optical cable mode,connector type, transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, andcenter wavelength.

Table 6-33 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards.

Table 6-33 Specifications for optical ports on WOSE boards

Item Specification

Optical cable mode Single-mode

Connector type MTRJ

Transmission distance < 15 km

Output optical power –15.0 dBm to –8.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –31.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –8.0 dBm

Center wavelength 1,300 nm

Table 6-34 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 177: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-34 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEb boards

Item Specification

Optical cable mode Single-mode

Connector type LC/PC

Transmission distance < 15 km

Output optical power –15.0 dBm to –8.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –31.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –8.0 dBm

Center wavelength 1,310 nm

6.14 WOSEc BoardThis describes the WOSEc board. The WOSEc is shortened from the WCDMA RNC Singlemode Optical interface board of E1/T1 (enhanced II). It is an Iub/Iur/Iu interface board. TheWOSEc boards are configured in the slots 0 and 15 in the WRBS.

The WOSEc performs the following functions:

l Supporting ATM over E1 over SDH bearer mode, providing 63 E1s

l Providing eight E1 ports that support Fractional ATM and CES functions

l Providing IMA function, supporting IMA/UNI mode, and supporting up to 63 IMA groupsand UNI links in total

l Providing intra-board ATM switching function

l Providing clock resource for the NodeB

l Receiving timing signals from the upper level equipment and sending them to the clockmodule

l The WOSEc supports 60 Mbit/s data streams.

CAUTIONl The WOSEc and the WBIE/WBIEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS.

l The WOSEc and the WOSE/WOSEb cannot be configured in the same WRBS.

NOTE

l The optical port on the WOSEc does not support the fractional ATM function.

l The electrical port on the WOSEc does not support the timeslot cross-connection function.

6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WOSEc: the LEDs and ports.

6.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc Board

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-49

Page 178: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc.

6.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc BoardThe WOSEc provides the following ports: OPT, E1, CLK1, and CLK2.

6.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc BoardThe WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11.

6.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards cover optical cable mode, connector type,transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and centerwavelength.

6.14.1 Panel of the WOSEc BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WOSEc: the LEDs and ports.

Figure 6-22 shows the WOSEc panel.

Figure 6-22 WOSEc panel

6.14.2 LEDs on the WOSEc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc.

Table 6-35 describes the LEDs on the WOSEc panel.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 179: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 6-35 LEDs on the WOSEc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the boardis active. In other modes, it indicates nothing.

OFF In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the boardis standby. In other modes, it indicatesnothing.

6.14.3 Ports on the WOSEc BoardThe WOSEc provides the following ports: OPT, E1, CLK1, and CLK2.

Table 6-36 describes the ports on the WOSEc panel.

Table 6-36 Ports on the WOSEc panel

Name Function Type

OPT Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical signals 155 Mbit/s LC/PC

E1/T1 E1 port, used to transmit and receive E1 signals DB50

CLK1 This port is used to output timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB, male

CLK2 This port is used to output timing signals that arereceived from the upper level equipment as a systemclock source.

SMB, male

6.14.4 DIP Switches on the WOSEc BoardThe WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11.

Figure 6-23 shows the DIP switches on the WOSEc.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-51

Page 180: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-23 DIP switches on the WOSEc

Table 6-37 describes the switches on the WOSEc.

Table 6-37 DIP switches on the WOSEc

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S3 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S4 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

OFF OFF

S5 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S6 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

OFF OFF

S7 1–8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 ON OFF

S8 1–8 RX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 OFF OFF

S11 1 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 ON ON

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 181: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 6-37.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 6-37.

6.14.5 Specifications for Optical Ports on WOSEc BoardsThe specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards cover optical cable mode, connector type,transmission distance, output optical power, receiver sensitivity, saturation, and centerwavelength.

Table 6-38 describes the specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards.

Table 6-38 Specifications for optical ports on WOSEc boards

Item Specification

Optical cable mode Single-mode

Connector type LC/PC

Transmission distance < 15 km

Output optical power –15.0 dBm to –8.0 dBm

Receiver sensitivity ≤ –31.0 dBm

Saturation ≤ –8.0 dBm

Center wavelength 1,310 nm

6.15 WSPUb BoardThis describes the WSPUb board. The WSPUb is shortened from the WCDMA RNC SignalingProcessing board (enhanced). It is configured in the WRBS. Each WRBS holds two WSPUbsin slots 10 and 11. The two boards work in the active/standby mode.

The WSPUb performs the following functions:

l Processing high-layer signaling of the Uu/Iu/Iur/Iub interface, such as the RRC signalingof the Uu interface, the RANAP signaling of the Iu interface, the RNSAP signaling of theIur interface, and the NBAP signaling of the Iub interface

l Allocating and managing various resources, such as PVC, AAL2, AAL2 Path, GTP-U,PDCP, IUUP, RLC, MACD, MDC, and FP, which are necessary for service setup, andestablishing signaling and service connections

l The WSPUb is of 75,000 Busy Hour Call Attempt (BHCA) processing capability, andsupports 100 NodeBs and 300 cells.

6.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the WSPUb.

6.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb Board

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-53

Page 182: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb.

6.15.1 Panel of the WSPUb BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the WSPUb.

Figure 6-24 shows the WSPUb panel.

Figure 6-24 WSPUb panel

6.15.2 LEDs on the WSPUb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb.

Table 6-39 describes the LEDs on the WSPUb panel.

Table 6-39 LEDs on the WSPUb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 183: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

6.16 WDMB BoardThis describes the WDMB board. The WDMB is shortened from the Power Distribution MonitorBoard. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet. Each powerdistribution box holds one WDMB.

The WDMB performs the following functions:

l Detecting two channels of –48 V input power voltages

l Detecting two lightning protection circuits

l Detecting six power distribution output switches

l Detecting analog signals of external environment

l Providing audible and visible alarms

l Communicating with the WMUXb, reporting the status of the power distribution box, andexchanging OM information

6.16.1 Panel of the WDMB BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WDMB: the LEDs and the switch.

6.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB BoardThere are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB.

6.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB BoardThe WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.

6.16.1 Panel of the WDMB BoardThere are the following components on the panel of the WDMB: the LEDs and the switch.

Figure 6-25 shows the WDMB panel.

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-55

Page 184: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 6-25 WDMB panel

You can use the alarm sound switch to set the power distribution box to emit sound or not:

l If you set the switch to ON, the power distribution box emits sound when it is faulty.

l If you set the switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not emit sound when it isfaulty.

6.16.2 LEDs on the WDMB BoardThere are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB.

Table 6-40 describes the LEDs on the WDMB panel.

Table 6-40 LEDs on the WDMB panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The WDMB works properly andcommunicates with the WMUXb properly.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The WDMB is not working or it does notcommunicate with the WMUXb properly.

OFF The power supply for the WDMB isabnormal or the power distribution box doesnot work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm concerning the powerdistribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALMLED is always ON. It is an indication that theALM LED is functional.

6 RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

6-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 185: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

6.16.3 DIP Switch on the WDMB BoardThe WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 6-26 shows the DIP switch on the WDMB.

Figure 6-26 DIP switch on the WDMB

With four bits, the DIP switch S2 is used to set the address of the WDMB.

To set the address, pull out the WDMB as described in the Replacing an RNC Power DistributionBox. Then, set S2 as listed in Table 6-41.

Table 6-41 DIP switch on the WDMB

DIP Switch Bit Status Meaning

S2 1, the mostsignificant bit

ON "0"

2 ON "0"

3 ON "0"

4, the leastsignificant bit

ON "0"

CAUTIONIn the RNC, the DIP switch on the WDMB must be set as listed in Table 6-41.

6.17 WOPB BoardThis describes the WOPB board. The WOPB is shortened from the WCDMA RNC OvervoltageProtection Board. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the RNC cabinet.Each power distribution box holds one WOPB.

The WOPB performs the following functions:

l Suppressing differential-mode surge voltage

l Suppressing common-mode surge voltage

RNCHardware Description 6 RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

6-57

Page 186: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 187: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

7 RNC Cables

About This Chapter

This part describes all the cables used inside and outside the RNC cabinet.

NOTE

l For detailed methods for installing these cables, refer to the RNC Installation Guide.

l The type of the optical cables that are actually used depends on the type of the interface boards inthe RNC and the type of the interface of the peer equipment.

7.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial CableThis describes the RNC 75-ohm coaxial cable. The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunkcables. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE inthe WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1 trunk signals.

7.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThis describes the RNC 120-ohm twisted pair cable. The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a typeof trunk cable. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1/T1 trunk signals.

7.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-modeoptical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode opticalcable connects the WLPU to the ODF or another NE and connects the WOSEb/WOSEc to theODF or another NE. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable can also connect the LANswitch to the ODF or another NE.

7.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPUin the WRSS to the ODF or another NE.

7.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-modeoptical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR to the ODF or another NE, or connects theWOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS to the ODF or another NE.

7.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-1

Page 188: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes the RNC LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The function and installation of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable in the BSC6800 isthe same as that of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable as described in this section.

7.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PCsingle-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the WMUXb in the WRBRsubrack, the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the ODF or another NE, the WOSEc in the WRBSsubrack to the ODF or another NE, or the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. The RNC2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is also used to connect the S3528G LAN switch andthe S3928P-EI LAN switch.

7.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. Thefunctions and installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNCis the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

7.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPUin the WRSS to the ODF or another NE, or interconnects the S3528G LAN switches, or connectsthe S3528G LAN switch to the ODF or another NE.

7.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in theRNC are the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

7.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-modeoptical cable interconnects the LAN switches, or connects the LAN switches to the ODF oranother NE.

7.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. It is used to interconnect LANswitches S3928P-EI and connect the LAN switch S3928P-EI to the ODF or another NE.

7.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PCmulti-mode optical cable is a type of the optical cables. It is optional. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PCmulti-mode optical cable is used for connecting the GE ports on the S3528G LAN Switch andthe S3928P-EI LAN switch when they are in a active/standby relationship.

7.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable interconnects theLAN switches or connects the LAN switch to the ODF, or another NE.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 189: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

7.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-modeoptical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable in theRNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

7.16 RNC Crossover CableThis describes the RNC crossover cable. The crossover cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It ismandatory. The number of the crossover cables to be configured is decided by the siterequirements. The crossover cable interconnects the LAN switches.

7.17 RNC Straight-Through CableThis describes the RNC straight-through cable. The straight-through cable is a type of Ethernetcables. It is mandatory. The number of the straight-through cables to be configured is decidedby the site requirements.

7.18 RNC Clock Signal CableThis describes the signal cable of the RNC clock. The clock cable is a type of signal cables. Itis optional. The clock cables are of two types. One type is used to send the timing signals to theWNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the WBIEb or the WOSEc in the WRBS is the Iu interfaceboard. The other type is used to send the timing signals from the BITS clock source to the WNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the RNC uses the BITS clock source.

7.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal CableThis describes the signal cable of the RNC alarm box. The signal cable of the alarm box is atype of signal cables. It is optional. The alarm box signal cable is used to send alarm informationto the alarm box for audible and visible display.

7.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXbThis describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. The signalcable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb is the straight-through cable. EachGRU suite is configured with two signal cables. It is optional. It transmits the positioninginformation and PPS signals from the GRU suite to the WMUX/WMUXb and the GPS OMinformation between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb.

7.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETcThis describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. The signal cableconnecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc is the straight-through cable. It is optional.It transmits the synchronization timing signals from the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc andthe GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc.

7.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes the monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box. The monitoringsignal cable of the power distribution box is a type of signal cables. It is mandatory. Themonitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is used to transmit monitoring signals fromthe power distribution box to the WRBS.

7.23 RNC Power CableThis describes the RNC power cable. The RNC power cables include the –48V power cablesand the GND power cables. They are mandatory. Each cabinet must be configured with fourpower cables, two of which are –48V power cables and two of which are GND power cables.The power cables connect the PDF and the RNC cabinets.

7.24 RNC PGND Cable

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-3

Page 190: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes the RNC PGND cable. The PGND cable is mandatory. Each RNC is configuredwith one PGND cable. When RNC cabinets are combined, three PGND cables are added toconnect two neighboring cabinets.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 191: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

7.1 RNC 75-ohm Coaxial CableThis describes the RNC 75-ohm coaxial cable. The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunkcables. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE inthe WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1 trunk signals.

The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the RNC has a structure of 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohmcoaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. Allof the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

AppearanceFigure 7-1 shows a 75-ohm coaxial cable.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-5

Page 192: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-1 75-ohm coaxial cable

One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is DB50 connector, and the other end has no connector.You have to make it on site.

NOTE

DB50 connectors are divided into straight connectors and bend connectors. The relationship between thestraight connectors and the signals of trunk cables is the same as that between the bend connectors and thesignals of truck cables. The installation positions of the two types of connectors are the same.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 193: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Pin AssignmentTable 7-1 describes the relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50connectors.

Table 7-1 Relationship between 75-ohm micro coaxial cables and DB50 connectors

DB50 Pin Signal Micro CoaxialCable No.

Label ChannelNo.

2 Tip W2.8 CHAN7 TX CHAN 7

3 Ring

5 Tip W2.7 CHAN7 RX

6 Ring

8 Tip W2.6 CHAN6 TX CHAN 6

9 Ring

11 Tip W2.5 CHAN6 RX

12 Ring

14 Tip W2.4 CHAN5 TX CHAN 5

15 Ring

17 Tip W2.3 CHAN5 RX

18 Ring

20 Tip W2.2 CHAN4 TX CHAN 4

21 Ring

23 Tip W2.1 CHAN4 RX

24 Ring

27 Tip W1.8 CHAN3 TX CHAN 3

28 Ring

30 Tip W1.7 CHAN3 RX

31 Ring

33 Tip W1.6 CHAN2 TX CHAN 2

34 Ring

36 Tip W1.5 CHAN2 RX

37 Ring

39 Tip W1.4 CHAN1 TX CHAN 1

40 Ring

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-7

Page 194: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DB50 Pin Signal Micro CoaxialCable No.

Label ChannelNo.

42 Tip W1.3 CHAN1 RX

43 Ring

45 Tip W1.2 CHAN0 TX CHAN 0

46 Ring

48 Tip W1.1 CHAN0 RX

49 Ring

Table 7-2 describes the signals listed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-2 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

Installation

The DB50 connector of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS. The other end is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and thento another NE, such as the CN, the NodeB, another RNC or GSM equipments (BSC) throughtransmission equipment. The other end can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions of the 75-ohm coaxial cables, refer to line 91 in 2.11.3 Connectionsof Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 29 and 30 in Connections of the WRBRsignal cables.

7.2 RNC 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThis describes the RNC 120-ohm twisted pair cable. The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a typeof trunk cable. It is optional. It connects the WBIE/WBIEb/WOSE/WOSEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS to the DDF or another NE, and transmits E1/T1 trunk signals.

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable used by the RNC has two types: 0.4 mm and 0.5 mm (corediameter). The core diameter that the DDF supports determines the type of the 120-ohm twistedpair cables to be used. By default, the 120-ohm twisted pair cable of 0.5mm core diameter isused.

Appearance

Figure 7-2 shows a 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 195: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-2 120-ohm twisted pair cable

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-9

Page 196: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is DB50 connector, and the other end has noconnector. You have to make it on site.

NOTE

DB50 connectors are divided into straight connectors and bend connectors. The relationship between thestraight connectors and the signals of trunk cables is the same as that between the bend connectors and thesignals of trunk cables. The installation positions of the two types of connectors are the same.

Pin Assignment

Table 7-3 describes the relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors.

Table 7-3 Relationship between 120-ohm twisted pair cables and DB50 connectors

DB50 Pin Signal Label Color Channel No.

2 TxTip7 CHAN 7 TX Red CHAN 7

3 TxRing7 Green

5 RxTip7 CHAN 7 RX Red

6 RxRing7 Orange

8 TxTip6 CHAN 6 TX Red CHAN 6

9 TxRing6 Blue

11 RxTip6 CHAN 6 RX White

12 RxRing6 Grey

14 TxTip5 CHAN 5 TX White CHAN 5

15 TxRing5 Orange

17 RxTip5 CHAN 5 RX White

18 RxRing5 Green

20 TxTip4 CHAN 4 TX White CHAN 4

21 TxRing4 Orange

23 RxTip4 CHAN 4 RX White

24 RxRing4 Blue

27 TxTip3 CHAN 3 TX Red CHAN 3

28 TxRing3 Green

30 RxTip3 CHAN 3 RX Red

31 RxRing3 Orange

33 TxTip2 CHAN 2 TX Red CHAN 2

34 TxRing2 Blue

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 197: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DB50 Pin Signal Label Color Channel No.

36 RxTip2 CHAN 2 RX White

37 RxRing2 Grey

39 TxTip1 CHAN 1 TX White CHAN 1

40 TxRing1 Orange

42 RxTip1 CHAN 1 RX White

43 RxRing1 Green

45 TxTip0 CHAN 0 TX White CHAN 0

46 TxRing0 Orange

48 RxTip0 CHAN 0 RX White

49 RxRing0 Blue

Table 7-4 describes the signals listed in Table 7-3.

Table 7-4 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring The other core of a twisted pair cable

Tip The other core of a twisted pair cable

Installation

The DB50 connector of the 120-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the WBIEb/WOSEc/WEIE/WFEE in the WRBS. The other end is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and thento another NE, such as the CN, the NodeB, another RNC or GSM equipments (BSC) throughtransmission equipment. The other end can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions of the 120-ohm coaxial cables, refer to line 91 in 2.11.3Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 29 and 30 in Connections ofthe WRBR signal cables.

7.3 RNC MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-modeoptical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode opticalcable connects the WLPU to the ODF or another NE and connects the WOSEb/WOSEc to theODF or another NE. The MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable can also connect the LANswitch to the ODF or another NE.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-11

Page 198: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

AppearanceFigure 7-3 shows an MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-3 MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU andODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The MTRJ opticalconnector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as theNodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector canalso be connected to another NE directly.

For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connectsthe WLPU and the ODF/another NE, refer to line 3 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONFor the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure thatthe IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WLPU panel, and the OUT end connects tothe RX optical port on the WLPU panel. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with theNE.

Installation of the MTRJ-2LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WOSEb/WOSEc and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS. The MTRJoptical connector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE suchas the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ opticalconnector can also be connected to another NE directly.

For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connectsthe WOSEb/WOSEc and the ODF/another NE, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Connections of theWRBR signal cables (1).

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 199: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONFor the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure thatthe IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel, and the OUT endconnects to the RX optical port on the WOSEb/WOSEc panel. Otherwise, the WOSEb/WOSEccannot communicate with the NE.

Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between LANSwitches and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch. The MTRJ optical connector isconnected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN,or RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also be connectedto another NE directly.

For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable which connectsthe LAN switch and the ODF or another NE, refer to lines 4 to 7 in 2.11.3 Connections of SignalCables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONFor the LC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure thatthe IN end connects to the TX optical port on the LAN switch, and the OUT end connects to theRX optical port on the LAN switch. Otherwise, the LAN switch cannot communicate with theNE.

7.4 RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPUin the WRSS to the ODF or another NE.

Appearance

Figure 7-4 shows an MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-4 MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-13

Page 200: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Installation of the MTRJ-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable Between WLPU andODF or Another NE

The SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The MTRJ opticalconnector is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as theNodeB, CN, or RNC through transmission equipment. The MTRJ optical connector can also beconnected to another NE directly.

For the installation positions of the MTRJ-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable which connectsthe WLPU and the ODF/another NE, refer to line 3 in Connections of Signal Cables in theWRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONFor the SC/PC connector, the RX end is labeled IN, and the TX end is labeled OUT. Ensure thatthe IN end connects to the TX optical port on the WLPU panel, and the OUT end connects tothe RX optical port on the WLPU panel. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with otherNEs through the ODF or other transmission devices.

7.5 RNC 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-modeoptical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR to the ODF or another NE, or connects theWOSEb/WOSEc in the WRBS to the ODF or another NE.

NOTE

A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode opticalcable to transmit signals.

Appearance

Figure 7-5 shows a 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-5 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWOSEc and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The FC/PC opticalconnector is connected to:

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 201: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, and RNCthrough transmission equipment

l Or another NE directly

For the installation positions of the optical cables, see lines 27 and 28 in Connections of theWRBR signal cables.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on theWOSEb/WOSEc panel and the FC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports onthe ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entityand the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, theWOSEb/WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF and othertransmission equipment.s

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWLPU and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The FC/PC opticalconnector is connected to:

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNCthrough transmission equipment

l Or another NE directly

For the installation position of the optical cable, see line ③ in Connections of Signal Cablesin the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the samenumber, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the RX end connects to theTX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end connects to the RX optical port on theconnected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.

7.6 RNC LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The function and installation of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable in the BSC6800 isthe same as that of the 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable as described in this section.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-15

Page 202: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

Before using a pair of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-mode optical cable, attach temporary labels 1 to the two ends of one LC/PC-FC/PC single mode opticalcable, and attach temporary labels 2 to the two ends of the other LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable.Then, assemble the two LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2FC/PC single-modeoptical cable.

AppearanceFigure 7-6 shows an LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-6 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWOSEc and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WOSEc in the WRBS. The FC/PC opticalconnector is connected to:

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, and RNCthrough transmission equipment

l Or another NE directly

For the installation positions of the optical cables, see lines 27 and 28 in Connections of theWRBR signal cables.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports on theWOSEb/WOSEc panel and the FC/PC connectors are connected to the TX/RX optical ports onthe ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entityand the TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, theWOSEb/WOSEc cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF and othertransmission equipment.s

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWLPU and ODF or Another NE

The LC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The FC/PC opticalconnector is connected to:

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or RNCthrough transmission equipment

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 203: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

l Or another NE directly

For the installation position of the optical cable, see line ③ in 2.11.3 Connections of SignalCables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the samenumber, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the RX end connects to theTX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end connects to the RX optical port on theconnected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.

7.7 RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PCsingle-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable connects the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the WMUXb in the WRBRsubrack, the WLPU in the WRSR subrack to the ODF or another NE, the WOSEc in the WRBSsubrack to the ODF or another NE, or the LAN switch to the ODF or another NE. The RNC2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is also used to connect the S3528G LAN switch andthe S3928P-EI LAN switch.

NOTE

A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode opticalcable to transmit signals.

AppearanceFigure 7-7 shows a 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-7 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable ThatConnects the WLPU with the WMUXb

Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPUwith the WMUXb.

The LC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connectedto the WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WMUXb in the WRBS.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-17

Page 204: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

For the installation positions, refer to lines 83, 84, ① and ② in Connections of Signal Cablesin the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the optical ports on the WLPUpanel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX and RX optical cables on the WMUXbpanel. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX endmust connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannotcommunicate with the WMUXb.

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable ThatConnects the WLPU with the ODF/Another NE

Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPUwith the ODF/another NE.

If the optical sub-board on the WLPU is the W4ASb or the W4ASc, the LC/PC optical connectorsof the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS,and the SC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable areconnected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN,or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also beconnected to another NE directly.

For the installation positions, refer to line ③ in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSRCabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on theWLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and theTX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPUcannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable thatconnects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE

Installation positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects theWOSEc with the ODF/another NE.

The LC/PC optical connectors of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connectedto the WOSEc in the WRBS. The SC/PC optical connectors are connected to the ODF in theequipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 205: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NEdirectly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Figure 3-6.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX and RX optical ports onthe WOSEc panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on theODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity andthe TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEccannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch Connection

The 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is used when the S3528G LAN switch isconfigured with the GBIC-LX-SM1310-A optical module and when the S3928P-EI LAN switchis configured with the SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. The SC/PC optical connector ofthe 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch (S3528G) andthe LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch (S3928P-EI).

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and theRX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7.8 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals. Thefunctions and installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in the RNCis the same as that of the 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

NOTE

Before using a pair of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable, attach temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode opticalcable, and attach temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.Then, assemble the two LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2SC/PC single-modeoptical cable.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-19

Page 206: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Appearance

Figure 7-8 shows an LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-8 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable ThatConnects the WLPU with the WMUXb

Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPUwith the WMUXb.

The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected tothe WLPU in the WRSS, and the SC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cable are connected to the WMUXb in the WRBS.

For the installation positions, refer to lines 83, 84, ① and ② in Connections of Signal Cablesin the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the optical ports on the WLPUpanel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX and RX optical cables on the WMUXbpanel. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and the TX endmust connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannotcommunicate with the WMUXb.

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable ThatConnects the WLPU with the ODF/Another NE

Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WLPUwith the ODF/another NE.

If the optical sub-board on the WLPU is the W4ASb or the W4ASc, the LC/PC optical connectorsof the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected to the WLPU in the WRSS, andthe SC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected tothe ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNCthrough transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to anotherNE directly.

For the installation positions, refer to line ③ in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSRCabinet.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 207: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on theWLPU panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and theTX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPUcannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable thatconnects the WOSEc with the ODF/another NE

Installation positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable that connects the WOSEcwith the ODF/another NE.

The LC/PC optical connectors of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are connected tothe WOSEc in the WRBS. The SC/PC optical connectors are connected to the ODF in theequipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC throughtransmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectors can also be connected to another NEdirectly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines 27 and 28 in Figure 3-6.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX and RX optical ports onthe WOSEc panel and the SC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on theODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity andthe TX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WOSEccannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch Connection

The SC/PC optical connector of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected tothe LAN switch (S3528G) and the LC/PC optical connector is connected to the LAN switch(S3928P-EI).

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-21

Page 208: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and theRX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7.9 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable connects the WLPUin the WRSS to the ODF or another NE, or interconnects the S3528G LAN switches, or connectsthe S3528G LAN switch to the ODF or another NE.

NOTE

A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode opticalcable to transmit signals.

AppearanceFigure 7-9 shows a 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-9 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWLPU and ODF or Another NE

One SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The other is connectedto:

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as a NodeB, CN, or RNCthrough transmission equipment

l Or another NE directly

For the installation position of the optical cable between the WLPU and the ODF or another NE,see line ③ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 209: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the samenumber, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the RX end connects to theTX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end connects to the RX optical port on theconnected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.

Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch (S3528G) Connection

The SC/PC optical connectors of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single mode optical cable are connectedto the S3528G LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end.During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TXoptical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.

One SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected tothe S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE suchas the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC opticalconnector can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Inactual installation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on theS3528G LAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/another NE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODFor other transmission equipment.

7.10 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable in theRNC are the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-23

Page 210: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

Before using a pair of SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-modeoptical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one SC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable, andput on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemblethe two SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

AppearanceFigure 7-10 shows an SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-10 SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable BetweenWLPU and ODF or Another NE

One SC/PC optical connector is connected to the WLPU in the WRSS. The other is connectedto:

l The ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such as a NodeB, CN, or RNCthrough transmission equipment

l Or another NE directly

For the installation position of the optical cable between the WLPU and the ODF or another NE,see line ③ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end are labeled 1 and 2. For the two connectors labeled the samenumber, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Ensure that the RX end connects to theTX optical port on the connected entity and the TX end connects to the RX optical port on theconnected entity. Otherwise, the WLPU cannot communicate with the NE.

Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch (S3528G) Connection

The SC/PC optical connectors of the SC/PC-SC/PC single mode optical cable are connected tothe S3528G LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Duringactual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX opticalports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 211: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.

One SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected tothe S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE suchas the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC opticalconnector can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actualinstallation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528GLAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/anotherNE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or othertransmission equipment.

7.11 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-modeoptical cable interconnects the LAN switches, or connects the LAN switches to the ODF oranother NE.

NOTE

Before using a pair of LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cables to replace one 2LC/PC-2LC/PC single-modeoptical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical cable, andput on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable. Then, assemblethe two LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cables to one 2LC/PC-2LC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Appearance

Figure 7-11 shows the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-11 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch Connection

The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch isconfigured with a SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. The LC/PC optical connectors ofthe LC/PC-LC/PC single mode optical cable are connected to the LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-25

Page 212: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the LC/PC optical connectorsand the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch with the ODF/Another NE.

The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch isconfigured with a SFP-GE-LX-SM1310-A optical module. One LC/PC optical connector of theLC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch. And the other LC/PCoptical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF inthe equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC throughtransmission equipment. The LC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on theLAN switch and the LC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and theTX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPUcannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

7.12 RNC LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. It is used to interconnect LANswitches S3928P-EI and connect the LAN switch S3928P-EI to the ODF or another NE.

NOTE

Before assembling two LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cables to a pair, attach temporary labels 1 toboth ends of one LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable, and attach temporary labels 2 to both ends ofthe other LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable. Then, assemble the two LC/PC-LC/PC multi-modeoptical cables to a pair of LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cables.

Appearance

Figure 7-12 shows the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 213: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-12 LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch with the ODF/Another NE.

The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch isconfigured with a SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. One LC/PC optical connector of theLC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the LAN switch, and the other LC/PCoptical connector of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF inthe equipment room and then to another NE such as the NodeB, CN, or another RNC throughtransmission equipment. The LC/PC optical connector can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. Ensure that the LC/PC connectors are connected with the TX/RX optical ports on theLAN switch and the LC/PC connectors are connected with TX/RX optical ports on the ODF/another NE. The RX end must connect to the TX optical port on the connected entity and theTX end must connect to the RX optical port on the connected entity. Otherwise, the WLPUcannot communicate with the other NE through the ODF and other transmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-LC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch Connection

The LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable is installed when the S3928P-EI LAN switch isconfigured with a SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. The LC/PC optical connectors of theLC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connected to the LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-LC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the LC/PC optical connectorsand the RX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-27

Page 214: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

7.13 RNC LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PCmulti-mode optical cable is a type of the optical cables. It is optional. The RNC LC/PC-SC/PCmulti-mode optical cable is used for connecting the GE ports on the S3528G LAN Switch andthe S3928P-EI LAN switch when they are in a active/standby relationship.

Appearance

Figure 7-13 shows the LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-13 LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the LC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch Connection

The LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is used when the S3528G LAN switch is configuredwith the GBIC-SX-MM850-A optical module and when the S3928P-EI LAN switch isconfigured with the SFP-GE-SX-MM850-A optical module. The SC/PC optical connector ofthe LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to the S3528G LAN switch and theLC/PC optical connector is connected to the S3928P-EI LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

CAUTIONThe two connectors at either end of the LC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is theTX end. During actual installation, wrong connection between the optical connectors and theRX and TX optical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7.14 RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. The optical cable interconnects theLAN switches or connects the LAN switch to the ODF, or another NE.

NOTE

A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode opticalcable to transmit signals. The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode opticalcable in the RNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 215: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

AppearanceFigure 7-14 shows a 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-14 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.

One SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected tothe S3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC single-mode optical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE suchas the NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC opticalconnector can also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. Forthe two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actualinstallation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528GLAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/anotherNE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or othertransmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch (S3528G) Connection

The SC/PC optical connectors of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connectedto the S3528G LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1and 2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end.During actual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TXoptical ports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7.15 RNC SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical CableThis describes the RNC SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable. The SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is a type of optical cables. It is optional. A pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-29

Page 216: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

optical cables can replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable to transmit signals.The functions and installation positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable in theRNC is the same as that of the 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

NOTE

Before using a pair of SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables to replace one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-mode optical cable, put on temporary labels 1 on the two ends of one SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode opticalcable, and put on temporary labels 2 on the two ends of the other SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.Then, assemble the two SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cables to one 2SC/PC-2SC/PC multi-modeoptical cable.

AppearanceFigure 7-15 shows an SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable.

Figure 7-15 SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable

Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable thatConnects the LAN Switch (S3528G) with the ODF/Another NE.

One SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable is connected to theS3528G LAN switch. And the other SC/PC optical connector of the SC/PC-SC/PC single-modeoptical cable is connected to the ODF in the equipment room and then to another NE such asthe NodeB, CN, or another RNC through transmission equipment. The SC/PC optical connectorcan also be connected to the NEs directly.

For the installation positions, refer to lines ④ to ⑦ in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables inthe WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and 2. Forthe two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. In actualinstallation, ensure that one SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the S3528GLAN switch and the other SC/PC connector is connected with the TX/RX optical port on the ODF/anotherNE. Otherwise, the S3528G LAN switch cannot communicate with the other NEs through the ODF or othertransmission equipment.

Installation Positions of the SC/PC-SC/PC Multi-Mode Optical Cable for Inter-LAN Switch (S3528G) Connection

The SC/PC optical connectors of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are connected tothe S3528G LAN switch.

For installation positions of the optical cables for inter-LAN switch connection, refer to lines 93and 94 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

The two SC/PC connectors at either end of the SC/PC-SC/PC multi-mode optical cable are labeled 1 and2. For the two connectors labeled the same number, one is the RX end and the other is the TX end. Duringactual installation, wrong connection between the SC/PC optical connectors and the RX and TX opticalports causes the failure of inter-LAN switch communication.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 217: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

7.16 RNC Crossover CableThis describes the RNC crossover cable. The crossover cable is a type of Ethernet cables. It ismandatory. The number of the crossover cables to be configured is decided by the siterequirements. The crossover cable interconnects the LAN switches.

Appearance

Figure 7-16 shows a crossover cable.

Figure 7-16 Crossover cable

Pin Assignment

Figure 7-17 shows the pins at one end of the crossover cable.

Figure 7-17 Pins of the crossover cable

Table 7-5 describes corresponding relationship between the pins at the two ends of the crossovercable.

Table 7-5 Pins of the crossover cable

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-3 White and green

X1-2 Orange X2-6 Green

X1-3 White and green X2-1 White and orange

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-31

Page 218: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-6 Green X2-2 Orange

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

InstallationFor the installation positions of the crossover cables, refer to lines 58, 59, 71, and 72 in2.11.3Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

7.17 RNC Straight-Through CableThis describes the RNC straight-through cable. The straight-through cable is a type of Ethernetcables. It is mandatory. The number of the straight-through cables to be configured is decidedby the site requirements.

The straight-through cable connects:

l The WMPU to the LAN switch

l The active and standby BAM servers to the LAN switches

l The LMT/hub to the LAN switches

l The WFEE/WFIE to the LAN switches

l The WFEE/WFIE to another NE

l The LAN switches to another NE

AppearanceFigure 7-18 shows a straight-through cable.

Figure 7-18 Straight-through cable

Pin AssignmentFigure 7-19 shows the pins at one end of the straight-through cable.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 219: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-19 Pins of the straight-through cable

Table 7-6 describes the pins at the two ends of a straight-through cable.

Table 7-6 Pins of the straight-through cable

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

InstallationFor the installation positions of the straight-through cables, refer to lines 37–46, 79, 80, 89, 90,and 4–7 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and lines 31–38 inConnections of the WRBR signal cables in 3.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBRCabinet.

7.18 RNC Clock Signal CableThis describes the signal cable of the RNC clock. The clock cable is a type of signal cables. Itis optional. The clock cables are of two types. One type is used to send the timing signals to theWNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the WBIEb or the WOSEc in the WRBS is the Iu interfaceboard. The other type is used to send the timing signals from the BITS clock source to the WNET/WNETc in the WRSS when the RNC uses the BITS clock source.

AppearanceFigure 7-20 shows a clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-33

Page 220: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-20 Clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc

Figure 7-21 shows a BITS clock cable.

Figure 7-21 BITS clock cable

InstallationFor the installation positions of the clock cable connecting the WBIEb/WOSEc and the WNET/WNETc, refer to line 92 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

For the installation positions of the BITS clock cables, refer to lines 87 and 88 in 2.11.3Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

7.19 RNC Alarm Box Signal CableThis describes the signal cable of the RNC alarm box. The signal cable of the alarm box is atype of signal cables. It is optional. The alarm box signal cable is used to send alarm informationto the alarm box for audible and visible display.

AppearanceThe connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The type whichis actually used is decided by the site survey report. The following takes an alarm box signalcable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-22 shows an alarm box signal cable with the DB9 connector.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 221: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-22 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment

Table 7-7 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Table 7-7 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

Installation

The RJ45 connector is connected to the input serial port of the alarm box. The DB9/DB25connector is connected to the serial port of the LMT computer which is installed with the AlarmManagement System. Figure 7-23 shows the installation position of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-23 Installation position of the alarm box signal cable

7.20 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WMUX/WMUXbThis describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb. The signalcable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb is the straight-through cable. EachGRU suite is configured with two signal cables. It is optional. It transmits the positioninginformation and PPS signals from the GRU suite to the WMUX/WMUXb and the GPS OMinformation between the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-35

Page 222: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

AppearanceThe two connectors of the signal cable are both RJ45. Figure 7-24 shows a signal cable thatconnects the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb.

Figure 7-24 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and WMUX/WMUXb

Pin AssignmentTable 7-8 describes the signals over the signal cable when the cable transmits positioninginformation and PPS signals.

Table 7-8 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (1)

PinNo.

Signal

WMUX/WMUXb Port GRU Suite Port

1 1PPS_RXD+ Positive phase PPSsignal received

1PPS_TXDP

Positive phase PPSsignal transmitted

2 1PPS_RXD– Negative phase 1PPSsignal received

1PPS_TXDN

Negative phase 1PPSsignal transmitted

3 TIME+ Positive phase 8 kHztiming signal received

8 kHzP Positive phase 8 kHztiming signal transmitted

4 NC Reserved GND Grounding signal

5 NC Reserved COM_RXD COM port signalreceived

6 TIME– Negative phase 8 kHztiming signal received

8kHzN Negative phase 8 kHztiming signal transmitted

7 NC Reserved GND Grounding signal

8 NC Reserved COM_TXD COM port signaltransmitted

Table 7-9 describes the signals over the signal cable when the cable transmits GPS OMinformation.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 223: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 7-9 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WMUX/WMUXb (2)

PinNo.

Signal

WMUX/WMUXb Port GRU Suite Port

1 TXD+ Positive COM portsignal transmitted

RXDP Positive COM port signalreceived

2 TXD– Negative COM portsignal transmitted

RXDN Negative COM portsignal received

3 RXD+ Positive COM portsignal received

TXDP Positive COM port signaltransmitted

4 NC Reserved NC Reserved

5 NC Reserved NC Reserved

6 RXD– Negative COM portsignal received

TXDN Negative COM portsignal transmitted

7 NC Reserved NC Reserved

8 NC Reserved NC Reserved

InstallationWhen the signal cable is used to transmit positioning information and PPS signals, one end ofthe cable is connected to the PPS1 port on the GRU suite and the other to the 1PPS port on theWMUX/WMUXb.

When the signal cable is used to transmit OM information, one end of the cable is connected tothe COM1 port on the GRU suite and the other to the COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb.

For the installation positions of the signal cables, refer to lines 76, 14, 77, and 78 in 2.11.3Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

NOTE

When the RNC is configured with only one GRU suite: The 1PPS port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 7is connected to the PPS1 port on the GRU suite. The 1PPS port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 8 isconnected to the PPS2 port on the GRU suite. The COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 7 isconnected to the COM1 port on the GRU suite. The COM1 port on the WMUX/WMUXb in slot 8 isconnected to the COM2 port on the GRU suite.

7.21 Signal Cable Between GRU Suite and WNET/WNETcThis describes the signal cable between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc. The signal cableconnecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc is the straight-through cable. It is optional.It transmits the synchronization timing signals from the GRU suite to the WNET/WNETc andthe GPS OM information between the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-37

Page 224: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

AppearanceThe two connectors of the signal cable are both RJ45. Figure 7-25 shows a signal cableconnecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc.

Figure 7-25 Signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc

Pin AssignmentTable 7-10 describes the signals over the signal cable.

Table 7-10 Signals over the signal cable connecting the GRU suite and the WNET/WNETc

PinNo.

Signal

WNET/WNETc Port GRU Suite Port

1 1PPS_RXD+

Positivephase PPSsignalreceived

1PPS_TXDP

Positive phase PPS signal transmitted

2 1PPS_RXD–

Negativephase PPSsignalreceived

1PPS_TXDN

Negative phase PPS signal transmitted

3 RS232_TXD

COM portsignaltransmitted

RS232RXD

COM port signal received

4 GND Groundingsignal

GND Grounding signal

5 GND Groundingsignal

GND Grounding signal

6 RS232_RXD

COM portsignalreceived

RS232_TXD

COM port signal transmitted

7 NC Reserved NC Reserved

8 NC Reserved NC Reserved

InstallationFor the installation positions of the signal cables, refer to lines 81 and 82 in 2.11.3 Connectionsof Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 225: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

When the RNC is configured with only one GRU suite: The CLK IN0 port on the WNET/WNETc in slot7 is connected to the CLK1 port on the GRU suite. The CLK IN0 port on the WNET/WNETc in slot 8 isconnected to the CLK2 port on the GRU suite.

7.22 Monitoring Signal Cable of RNC Power DistributionBox

This describes the monitoring signal cable of the RNC power distribution box. The monitoringsignal cable of the power distribution box is a type of signal cables. It is mandatory. Themonitoring signal cable of the power distribution box is used to transmit monitoring signals fromthe power distribution box to the WRBS.

AppearanceThe two connectors of the monitoring signal cable are both DB15. Figure 7-26 shows themonitoring signal cable of the power distribution box.

Figure 7-26 Monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box

Pin AssignmentTable 7-11 describes the signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box.

Table 7-11 Signals over the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box

Start End Meaning Remarks

X1.2 X2.2 TX+ Twisted pair

X1.3 X2.3 TX-

X1.6 X2.6 RX+ Twisted pair

X1.7 X2.7 RX-

Table 7-12 describes the signals listed in Table 7-11.

Table 7-12 Signals

Signal Pin Assignment

TX Positive phase signal transmitted

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-39

Page 226: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Signal Pin Assignment

TX Negative phase signal transmitted

RX Positive phase signal received

RX Negative phase signal received

Installation

For the installation positions of the monitoring signal cables of the power distribution box, referto line 18 in 2.11.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the WRSR Cabinet, and line 7 in 3.3.3Connections of Signal Cables in the WRBR Cabinet.

7.23 RNC Power CableThis describes the RNC power cable. The RNC power cables include the –48V power cablesand the GND power cables. They are mandatory. Each cabinet must be configured with fourpower cables, two of which are –48V power cables and two of which are GND power cables.The power cables connect the PDF and the RNC cabinets.

Cable List

Table 7-13 lists the power cables that connect the RNC cabinet.

Table 7-13 Power cables connecting the RNC cabinet

Cable Name Color Cross-SectionalArea

Type and InstallationPosition of Connector1

Type and InstallationPosition of Connector 2

External –48V power cable

Blue 25 mm2 Cord end terminal/At the–48 V input of each RNCcabinet

OT terminal/At the –48 Voutput of the PDF

External GNDpower cable

Black 25 mm2 Cord end terminal/At theRTN input of each RNCcabinet

OT terminal/At the GNDoutput of the PDF

NOTE

l The minimum radius of bend of the power cables is 30 mm. Each cabinet is configured with two-48V power cables and two GND power cables.

l The lengths of the power cables shipped with the RNC are 6 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35m, 40 m, 50 m, and 60 m. The required lengths of the power cables are listed in the site survey report.

l The colors of the power cables listed here are just for reference. In case of special requirements, thecolors can be changed to meet the requirements.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 227: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Appearance

The power cables have the same appearance except the colors, as shown in Figure 7-27.

Figure 7-27 RNC -48V/GND power cables

(1) Cord end terminal (2) OT terminal

Installation

For details of installing the power cables, refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables.

7.24 RNC PGND CableThis describes the RNC PGND cable. The PGND cable is mandatory. Each RNC is configuredwith one PGND cable. When RNC cabinets are combined, three PGND cables are added toconnect two neighboring cabinets.

Cable List

Table 7-14 lists the PGND cables that connect the RNC cabinet.

Table 7-14 PGND cables connecting the RNC cabinet

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

Min.BendingRadius

Type andInstallationPosition ofConnector 1

Type andInstallationPosition ofConnector 2

Quantity

ExternalPGNDcable

Greenandyellow

25mm2

30 mm OT terminal/Atthe grounding boltat the top back ofeach RNC cabinet

OT terminal/Atthe PGND outputof the PDF

1 percabinet

Inter-cabinetPGNDcable

Greenandyellow

6 mm2 15 mm OT terminal/Atthe PGND busbarof each RNCcabinet

OT terminal/Atthe PGND busbarof each RNCcabinet

3 percabinet

Appearance

Figure 7-28 shows a PGND cable.

RNCHardware Description 7 RNC Cables

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

7-41

Page 228: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 7-28 PGND cable

(1) OT terminal

InstallationFor details on how to install the PGND cable, refer to Installing Power Cables and PGND Cables.

7 RNC CablesRNC

Hardware Description

7-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 229: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

8 LEDs on RNC Boards

About This Chapter

This describes the LEDs on the RNC boards and on the front panels of the power distributionbox, GRU suite, and LAN switch. The RNC boards include the following types: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE, WFEE, WFIE, WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WMUX/WMUXb, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, WSPUb, and WDMB.

8.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power Distribution BoxThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDsRUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box.

8.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM,and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite.

8.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panelof the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100MEthernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports.

8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the powerLED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports.

8.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb.

8.6 LEDs on the WEIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WEIE.

8.7 LEDs on the WFEE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFEE.

8.8 LEDs on the WFIE Board

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-1

Page 230: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

This describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFIE.

8.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN,ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc.

8.10 LEDs on the WHPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel ofthe WHPU.

8.11 LED on the WLPU BoardThis describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board.

8.12 LEDs on the WMPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panelof the WMPU.

8.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb.

8.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc.

8.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb.

8.16 LEDs on the WOSEc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc.

8.17 LEDs on the WSPUb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb.

8.18 LEDs on the WDMB BoardThere are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 231: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

8.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the RNC Power DistributionBox

This describes LEDs on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box. There are two LEDsRUN and ALM on the front panel of the RNC power distribution box.

Table 8-1 describes the LEDs.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the power distribution box

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The WDMB works properly andcommunicates with the WMUXb properly.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The WDMB is not working or it does notcommunicate with the WMUXb properly.

OFF The power supply for the WDMB isabnormal or the power distribution boxdoes not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm concerning the powerdistribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.However, in the WDMB self-test, theALM LED is always ON. It is an indicationthat the ALM LED is functional.

8.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the GRU SuiteThis describes LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM,and ACT on the front panel of the GRU suite.

Table 8-2 describes the LEDs.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the front panel of the GRU suite

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green

ON for 1 s andOFF for 1 s The GRU suite works properly.

ON The power supply is normal but theGRU suite is faulty.

OFF The power supply is abnormal or theGRU suite is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-3

Page 232: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT GreenON The GRU suite obtains correct

positioning information.

OFF The GRU suite cannot obtain correctpositioning information.

8.3 LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch (S3528G)This describes LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch. The LEDs on the front panelof the LAN switch are the power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, LEDs of 10M/100MEthernet ports, and LEDs of GBIC module ports.

Table 8-3 describes the LEDs.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the front panel of the S3528G LAN switch

Name Label Color Status Meaning

Power LED PWR Green

ON The LAN switch is powered on.

OFF The LAN switch is powered off.

Ethernet port statemode LED

A/L Green

ON orOFF

At any time, when either the A/L or theD/S LED is ON, the other LED must beOFF. If the A/L LED is ON and the D/SLED is OFF, you can infer that the 10M/100M Ethernet ports are in theACTIVE/LINK mode. If the A/L LEDis OFF and the D/S LED is ON, it is anindication that the 10M/100M Ethernetports are in the DUPLEX/SPEED mode.

D/S Green

ON orOFF

LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernetports (when A/LLED is on, D/SLED is off, andports are inACTIVE/LINKmode)

None Yellow

ON There is traffic over the port.

OFF There is no traffic over the port.

None Green

ON The port is in the LINK OK state(normal connection).

OFFThe port is in LINK FAULT status (noconnection) or in LINK ERROR status(connection error).

LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernetports (when A/LLED is off, D/SLED is on, and

None Yellow

ON The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.

OFF The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.

None Green ON The port provides the rate of 100 Mbit/

s.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 233: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Color Status Meaning

ports are inDUPLEX/SPEEDmode)

OFF The port provides the rate of 10 Mbit/s.

LED of GBICmodule port

ACT Yellow

ON There is traffic over the port.

OFF There is no traffic over the port.

LINK Green

ON A GBIC module is inserted in the port.

OFF No GBIC module is inserted in the port.

NOTE

After the S3528G LAN switch is powered on and initialized, the Ethernet port state mode LED A/L is onand the LED D/S is off. You can infer that the 10 M/100 M Ethernet ports are in ACTIVE/LINK mode.

8.4 LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch (S3928P-EI)This describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. The LEDs refer to the powerLED, the DC power LED, Ethernet port state mode LEDs, the digit display LED, LEDs of 10M/100M Ethernet ports, and LEDs of 1000Base-X SFP ports.

Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch.

Table 8-4 LEDs on the front panel of the S3928P-EI LAN switch

Name Label Status Meaning

Power LED PWR

Green; ON The LAN switch isoperational.

Green; Flash at 1 HzAfter the system is poweredon, it is in self-test state or isdownloading software.

Red; ONAfter the system is poweredon, the self-test fails and thesystem is faulty.

Yellow; Flash at 1 HzAfter the system is poweredon, some ports fail to performthe self-test.

OFF The LAN switch is poweredoff.

DC PowerLED(PWR)

RPS Green; ONThe DC power supply and theinternal AC power areoperational.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-5

Page 234: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

Yellow; ON

The AC power supply is faultyor is disconnected, and theinternal DC power isoperational.

OFF The DC power supply is notconnected.

DigitaldisplayLED

Unit

Duringtheself-test

The PWR LED isgreen and flashing.

The self-test items from one tonine are displayed.

If theself-testfails,

The PWR LED isyellow and flashing. The failed self-test items are

displayed.The PWR LED is redand on.

Softwareloading

The PWR LED isgreen and flashing.

During the software loading, astub is rotating clockwise.

Fanfailure

The PWR LED is redand on. The letter F is displayed.

Unit id Do not press thebutton.

The unit ID of the Fabric portis displayed. If the system isoperational alone, the number1 is displayed.

Modestatus LED Mode

Green; ON

Rate mode. The rate of the 10Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port,1000 Mbit/s SFP port, orFabric port that uses 1000Mbit/s SFP

Yellow; ON Duplex mode. The duplexinformation about the 10Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s port,1000 Mbit/s SFP port, orFabric port that uses 1000Mbit/s SFP

10Base-T/100Base-TX portLED

None Ratemode

Green; ON The rate of the port is 100Mbit/s.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON The rate of the port is 10 Mbit/s.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 235: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

Duplexmode

Green; ON The 10M/100M port works infull-duplex mode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON The 10M/100M port works inhalf duplex mode.

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFFThe 10M/100M port is neitherreceiving nor transmittingdata.

1000Base-X SFP portLED

None

Ratemode

Green; ON The rate of the port is 1000Mbit/s.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

Duplexmode

Green; ON The 10M/100M port works infull-duplex mode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

PoEmode

Green; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF -

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-7

Page 236: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Name Label Status Meaning

LED of the1000Base-X SFP portwhen the1000Base-X SFP portis set toFabricmode

None

Ratemode

Green; ON

The 1000Base-X SFP port isreceiving or transmitting data.The equipment is in IRF ringmode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; ON

The 1000Base-X SFP port isreceiving or transmitting data.The equipment is in IRF linkmode.

Yellow; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Green; Flash at 3 Hz The Fabric port is faulty.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

Duplexmode

Green; ONThe 1000Base-X SFP portworks in full-duplex Fabricmode.

Green; Flash at 1 Hz The 10M/100M port isreceiving or transmitting data.

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFF The 10M/100M port is notconnected.

PoEmode

Yellow; Flash at 3 Hz The 10M/100M port fails toperform the self-test.

OFFThe 10M/100M port is neitherreceiving nor transmittingdata.

8.5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WBIE/WEIEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WBIE/WBIEb.

Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 237: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 8-5 LEDs on the WBIE/WBIEb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WBIE/WBIEb, this LED isalways on because the WBIE/WBIEbdoes not work in active/standbymode.

OFF None

8.6 LEDs on the WEIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WEIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WEIE.

Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the WEIE panel.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the WEIE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-9

Page 238: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ACT Green ON For the WEIE, this LED is alwayson because the WEIE does notwork in active/standby mode.

OFF None

8.7 LEDs on the WFEE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFEE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFEE.

Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the WFEE panel.

Table 8-7 LEDs on the WFEE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WFEE, this LED is always onbecause the WFEE does not work inactive/standby mode.

OFF None

8.8 LEDs on the WFIE BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFIE board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on thepanel of the WFIE.

Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the WFIE panel.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 239: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 8-8 LEDs on the WFIE panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFF for0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

8.9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc BoardThis describes LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc board. There are three LEDs RUN,ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc.

Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON For the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc, thisLED is always on because the WFMR/WFMRb/WFMRc does not work inactive/standby mode.

OFF None

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-11

Page 240: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

8.10 LEDs on the WHPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WHPU board. There are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel ofthe WHPU.

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the WHPU panel.

Table 8-10 LEDs on the WHPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 sand OFF for1 s

The board is active and functional.

ON for 2 sand OFF for2 s

The board is standby and functional.

ON for 1 sand OFF for5 s

The board is idle. This may occur only when thenumber of the active WHPUs that is configuredon the LMT is smaller than the actual numberminus 1.

ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON orflashing

There is a fault alarm.

8.11 LED on the WLPU BoardThis describes the LED RUN on the WLPU board.

Table 8-11 describes the LED on the WLPU panel.

Table 8-11 LED on the WLPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 241: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

8.12 LEDs on the WMPU BoardThis describes LEDs on the WMPU. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panelof the WMPU.

Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the WMPU panel.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the WMPU panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

8.13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WMUX/WMUXb.

Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the WMUX/WMUXb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for 1s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s and OFFfor 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-13

Page 242: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

8.14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, CLK, and ACT on the panel of the WNET/WNETc.

Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the WNET/WNETc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

CLK Green ON for 0.25 s and OFFfor 0.25 s

The clock is in fast pull-in status.

ON for 3 s and OFF for1 s

The clock is in locked status.

ON for 1 s and OFF for3 s

The clock is in hold status.

ON for 1 s and OFF for1 s

The clock is in free-run status.

ON There is a fault alarm.

OFF

ACT Green ON The clock sub-board on this board isactive.

OFF The clock sub-board on this board isstandby.

8.15 LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb board. There are three LEDs RUN, ALM, andACT on the panel of the WOSE/WOSEb.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 243: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the WOSE/WOSEb panel.

Table 8-15 LEDs on WOSE/WOSEb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that theboard is active. In other modes, itindicates nothing.

OFF In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that theboard is standby. In other modes, itindicates nothing.

8.16 LEDs on the WOSEc BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WOSEc.

Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the WOSEc panel.

Table 8-16 LEDs on the WOSEc panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-15

Page 244: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ACT Green ON In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the boardis active. In other modes, it indicates nothing.

OFF In 1:1 backup mode, it indicates that the boardis standby. In other modes, it indicatesnothing.

8.17 LEDs on the WSPUb BoardThere are three LEDs RUN, ALM, and ACT on the panel of the WSPUb.

Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the WSPUb panel.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the WSPUb panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The board is in normal operation.

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board isfaulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board isfaulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is active.

OFF The board is standby.

8.18 LEDs on the WDMB BoardThere are two LEDs RUN and ALM on the panel of the WDMB.

Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the WDMB panel.

Table 8-18 LEDs on the WDMB panel

LED Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON for 1 s and OFFfor 1 s

The WDMB works properly andcommunicates with the WMUXb properly.

8 LEDs on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 245: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

LED Color Status Meaning

ON for 0.125 s andOFF for 0.125 s

The WDMB is not working or it does notcommunicate with the WMUXb properly.

OFF The power supply for the WDMB isabnormal or the power distribution box doesnot work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm concerning the powerdistribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.However, in the WDMB self-test, the ALMLED is always ON. It is an indication that theALM LED is functional.

RNCHardware Description 8 LEDs on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

8-17

Page 246: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)
Page 247: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

About This Chapter

This describes the DIP switches on the following RNC boards: the WBIE/WBIEb, WEIE,WFEE, WFSM, WHPU, WLPU, WMPU, WNET/WNETc, WOSE/WOSEb, WOSEc, andWDMB.

9.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides thefollowing DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12.

9.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

9.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

9.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM BoardThis describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board.

9.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU BoardThis describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board.

9.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch.

9.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU BoardThe WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch.

9.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switchS2 on its clock sub-board.

9.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb providesthe following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9.

9.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc Board

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-1

Page 248: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

The WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11.

9.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB BoardThe WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 249: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

9.1 DIP Switches on the WBIE/WBIEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb board. The WBIE/WBIEb provides thefollowing DIP switches: S17, S16, S15, S5, S6, S10, S11, S13, S14, S7, S8, S9, and S12.

Figure 9-1 shows the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.

Figure 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb

Table 9-1 describes the DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb.

Table 9-1 DIP switches on the WBIE/WBIEb

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwistedPair Cable

S17 1 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF

3 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 16–23

ON OFF

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-3

Page 250: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwistedPair Cable

4 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 24–31

ON OFF

5–8 Reserved ON OFF

S16 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S15 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S5 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 8–11

ON OFF

S6 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 12–15

ON OFF

S10 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 16–19

ON OFF

S11 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 20–23

ON OFF

S13 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 24–27

ON OFF

S14 1-8 Impedance selection switch of E1s/T1s 28–31

ON OFF

S7 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 ON OFF

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 8–15 ON OFF

S9 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16–23

ON OFF

S12 1-8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 24–31

ON OFF

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 251: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the unbalanced mode. In this case,the TX end is grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to ON. When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the balanced mode. In this case, the TXend is not grounded. That is, the corresponding bits of DIP switches are set to OFF.

l Whether in balanced or unbalanced mode, the RX end is not grounded.

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 9-1.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 9-1.

9.2 DIP Switches on the WEIE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WEIE board. The WEIE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Figure 9-2 shows the DIP switches on the WEIE.

Figure 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE

NOTE

With two identical sub-boards, the WEIE has two groups of DIP switches of the same type, for example,two S1s, as shown in Figure 9-2.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-5

Page 252: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 9-2 describes the DIP switches on the WEIE.

Table 9-2 DIP switches on the WEIE

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 1–8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0–7(16–23)

ON OFF OFF

S2 1–8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8–15(24–31)

ON OFF OFF

S3 1 Indication ofimpedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0–15(16–31)

ON OFF ON

2 ON ON OFF

S4 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7(16–23)

ON OFF OFF

S5 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 8–15(24–31)

ON OFF OFF

NOTE

l The DIP switches on the lower sub-board control links 0–15 and the DIP switches on the upper sub-board control links 16–31. For example, in Figure 9-2, the S4 on the lower sub-board is the TXground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7, and the S4 on the upper sub-board is the TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 16–23.

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1transport is used.

l Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

l Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

l Table 9-2 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.

9.3 DIP Switches on the WFEE BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WFEE board. The WFEE provides the following DIPswitches: S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Figure 9-3 shows the DIP switches on the WFEE.

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 253: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the WFEE.

Table 9-3 DIP switches on the WFEE

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S1 1–8 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF OFF

S2 1–8 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF OFF

S3 1 Indication ofimpedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–15

ON OFF ON

2 ON ON OFF

S4 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF OFF

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-7

Page 254: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

Setting for100-ohmTwisted PairCable

S5 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 8–15

ON OFF OFF

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l The cable resistance is 75 ohm or 120 ohm when E1 transport is used, and is 100 ohm when T1transport is used.

l Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

l Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

l Table 9-3 shows the DIP switch setting for the 100-ohm twisted pair cable.

9.4 DIP Switch on the WFSM BoardThis describes an S1 DIP switch on the WFSM board.

Figure 9-4 shows the DIP switch on the WFSM.

Figure 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM

The DIP switch S1 has four bits. It is used to set the address of the WFSM.

To set the address, pull out the fan drawer as described in the RNC Site Maintenance Guide.Then, set S1 as listed in Table 9-4.

Table 9-4 DIP switch on the WFSM

DIP Switch Bit Status Meaning

S1 1, the least significant bit ON 0

2 OFF 1

3 ON 0

4, the most significant bit ON 0

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 255: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

CAUTIONIn the RNC, the DIP switch on the WFSM must be set as listed in Table 9-4.

9.5 DIP Switch on the WHPU BoardThis describes an S2 DIP switch on the WHPU board.

Figure 9-5 shows the DIP switch on the WHPU.

Figure 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU

Table 9-5 describes the DIP switch on the WHPU.

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the WHPU

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Meaning Description

S2 1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational statusselection bit

OFF The board is indebugging mode.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-9

Page 256: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Meaning Description

2 ON (default) The board is in thenormal mode.

Operation mode selectionbit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selectionbit

In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog functionis enabled.

Watchdog functionselection bit

OFF The watchdog functionis disabled.

9.6 DIP Switch on the WLPU BoardThe WLPU provides an S700 DIP switch.

Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the WLPU.

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 257: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 9-6 describes the DIP switch on the WLPU.

Table 9-6 DIP switch on the WLPU

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational status selectionbit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation mode selection bit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog function selectionbit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

9.7 DIP Switch on the WMPU BoardThe WMPU provides an S1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the WMPU.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-11

Page 258: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU

Table 9-7 describes the DIP switch on the WMPU.

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the WMPU

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational status selectionbit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation mode selection bit

OFF The board is in theequipment test mode.

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is always setto OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog function selectionbit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 259: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

9.8 DIP Switch on the WNET/WNETc BoardThere is no DIP switch on the main board of the WNET/WNETc, whereas there is a DIP switchS2 on its clock sub-board.

Figure 9-8 shows the DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc.

Figure 9-8 DIP switch on the clock sub-board of the WNET/WNETc

Table 9-8 describes the DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc.

Table 9-8 DIP switch on clock sub-board on the WNET/WNETc

Bit Status Meaning Description

1 ON (default) The board is in normaloperation.

Operational statusselection bit

OFF The board is in debuggingmode.

2 ON (default) The board is in the normalmode.

Operation modeselection bit

OFF The board is in the equipmenttest mode.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-13

Page 260: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Bit Status Meaning Description

3 ON WRSS type selection bit In the RNC, it is alwaysset to OFF.

OFF (default)

4 ON (default) The watchdog function isenabled.

Watchdog functionselection bit

OFF The watchdog function isdisabled.

9.9 DIP Switches on the WOSE/WOSEb BoardThis describes the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb board. The WOSE/WOSEb providesthe following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S9.

Figure 9-9 shows the DIP switches on the WOSE/WOSEb.

Figure 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb

Table 9-9 describes the settings and meanings of DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb.

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 261: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Table 9-9 DIP switches on WOSE/WOSEb

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable

Setting for 120-ohm Twisted PairCable

S3 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S4 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

OFF OFF

S5 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S6 1–4 Impedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

OFF OFF

S7 1–8 TX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

S8 1–8 RX ground switchof E1s/T1s 0–7

OFF OFF

S9 1 Indication ofimpedanceselection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 ON ON

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 9-9.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 9-9.

9.10 DIP Switches on the WOSEc BoardThe WOSEc provides the following DIP switches: S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, and S11.

Figure 9-10 shows the DIP switches on the WOSEc.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-15

Page 262: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

Figure 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc

Table 9-10 describes the switches on the WOSEc.

Table 9-10 DIP switches on the WOSEc

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting for75-ohmCoaxialCable

Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable

S3 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

ON OFF

S4 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 0–3

OFF OFF

S5 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

ON OFF

S6 1–4 Impedance selection switch ofE1s/T1s 4–7

OFF OFF

S7 1–8 TX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 ON OFF

S8 1–8 RX ground switch of E1s/T1s 0–7 OFF OFF

S11 1 Indication of impedance selectionswitch of E1s/T1s 0–7

ON OFF

2 ON ON

9 DIP Switches on RNC BoardsRNC

Hardware Description

9-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 03 (2008-08-30)

Page 263: RNC Hardware Description-(V100R010_03)

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.

l Ensure that the matching between the different types of DIP switches is correct.

l The DIP switch setting for 75-ohm coaxial cable is shown in Table 9-10.

l The DIP switch setting for 120-ohm twisted pair cable is shown in Table 9-10.

9.11 DIP Switch on the WDMB BoardThe WDMB provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 9-11 shows the DIP switch on the WDMB.

Figure 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB

With four bits, the DIP switch S2 is used to set the address of the WDMB.

To set the address, pull out the WDMB as described in the Replacing an RNC Power DistributionBox. Then, set S2 as listed in Table 9-11.

Table 9-11 DIP switch on the WDMB

DIP Switch Bit Status Meaning

S2 1, the mostsignificant bit

ON "0"

2 ON "0"

3 ON "0"

4, the leastsignificant bit

ON "0"

CAUTIONIn the RNC, the DIP switch on the WDMB must be set as listed in Table 9-11.

RNCHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on RNC Boards

Issue 03 (2008-08-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

9-17